Prima TM SM Ir-392 01e

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE
GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual

How to Use PDF Manual
FCR PRIMA Tm
Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation
Search the error code. Installation Specifications

Abnormal image occurs. Preparation for Installation
Bootup does not take place, and the panel LED remains Installation Procedures (Mechanical)
as “ ”. Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Procedures for Changing the RU IP Address
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Procedures for Changing the IP Address of the FTP Server
Installing Optional Items (Anti-Drop Retainer)
Software Control Installing Optional Items (Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon)
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection Check) When Installed in Patient Environment
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
SND37A Board LEDs Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
CPU37A Board LEDs
Unit Locations Preventive Maintenance Programs
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts:
2nd-Year / 4th-Year
Image Data Flows
Procedures
Voltage Check
Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints
Sensitivity/Shading Correction Install/version update software and applications.

Format Adjustment Back up/restore machine-specific data.
Back up/restore configuration data.
RU PC-TOOL
Parts Related Checkpoints
MUTL
Parts List (INDEX)
-1-
To GUIDE PAGE
CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

FCR PRIMA Tm
Features of the Client PC Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations
Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

List of CLIENT PC-TOOL Commands Operation in ON-LINE Mode
Operation in OFF-LINE Mode
Precautions in Using the Client PC
Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD-ROM

Data Flow of Commands
Drive
UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
Precautions in Setting the “Windows Firewall”
in Console READ and WRITE
Import and Export
Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options”
in Client PC
Maintenance
Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL

Acquisition of Log Information
Check/Acquisition of History Data
Check/Acquisition of Configuration Data
MUTL
Version Update
-2-
How to Use PDF Manual
Hyperlinks
A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored " " mark in this manual.
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section.
- Example of Hyperlink -
{MC:3.1_Front Cover}
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.
-3-
BLANK PAGE
-4-
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY l Target devices of this Service Manual
The target device of this Service Manual (020-234-xxE) is CR-IR 392 with
serial numbers # xxx30001 to 39999.
FCR PRIMA Tm For CR-IR 392 with serial number # xxx30000 or earlier, 40000 or later,
please use CR-IR 392 Service Manual (020-233-xxE).
CR-IR 392 l Software to be used in this device
Service Manual Software "114Y2245001A11 (V3.0) or later" is used in this device.
The part number of the software must be confirmed before performing the
software installation and upgrade.
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the

unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2014 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 020-234-01E
1st Edition - Nov. 5th, 2014
2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
1. Handling of this Manual 1.2 Precautions for Handling of this Manual
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.

1.1 About this Manual
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel
authorized by FUJIFILM Corporation.
n Scope
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation,
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 392. The machine is
categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should
be taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this
n Notation of Unit Symbols manual.
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI)
are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of
the SI, are used in some cases. FUJIFILM Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of
this manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service
personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product.
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to
improvements on the product.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.1

0.2
1.3 About Notation in the Manual n Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component removed
n Notation of Cautions, Warnings, etc. is to be reinstalled.
The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "instruction", "note", and "reference" are shown CHECK This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
below. the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
WARNING " Check/Adjustment Procedures."
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed. - Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
CAUTION improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction
- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied to
is not observed.
screw sections of installed parts/components.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or
Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
difficult-to-recover trouble).
u INSTRUCTION u
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if the
instruction is not observed. That Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
u NOTE u have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure. If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
REFERENCE Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

n Indication of Refer To
Name Inspection Calibration
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below. Dosimeter - 
{MC:5.1_Cassette ejection sensor (SA4)} Steel rule (150 mm)  -
Steel rule (300 mm)  -
n Notation in the Manual
Digital multimeter  
In this Service Manual, the CR-IR 392 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU (Reader Unit),
the FM-DL100 as the Printer, and the CR-IR348CL/DR-ID 300CL as the Console. Calipers  () -
: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

Contents Safety Precaution 0.3
CR-IR 392 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions............................................ Safety-1 3. Protective Housings against

1.1 General Precautions..............................................................Safety-1 Laser Exposure............................................... Safety-10
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation.....................................Safety-2
1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment......................................Safety-2 4. CLASSIFICATION.............................................Safety-11
1.3.1 Additional Protective Grounding....................................................Safety-2 5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves............ Safety-12
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine....................................Safety-3 5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)...................................Safety-12
1.5 Notes on Additional Stand for LCD Use.................................Safety-3 5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2/EN60601-1-2.............Safety-12
1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where
the Additional Stand for LCD Is Used............................................Safety-3 6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS.................... Safety-15
1.5.2 Cautions in Using the Additional Stand for LCD............................Safety-3
7. Cautions on Network...................................... Safety-16
1.5.3 Precautions in
Preventing the Additional Stand for LCD from Toppling................Safety-3
2. Labels................................................................. Safety-4
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels........................................................Safety-4
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations..............................Safety-4
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels.....................................................Safety-5
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels.......................................................Safety-6
2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations...........Safety-6
2.3.1 Scanning Optics Unit.....................................................................Safety-6
2.3.2 Covers...........................................................................................Safety-7
2.3.3 Dummy Cassette (For Mobile)......................................................Safety-8
2.3.4 Erasure Unit..................................................................................Safety-8
2.4 Safety and Symbols..............................................................Safety-9

Contents Safety Precaution 0.4
Product Specifications
1. Specifications of the Machine.............................Spec-1

1.1 Product Code..........................................................................Spec-1
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types...................................................Spec-1
1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes........................................Spec-1
1.4 Optional Item/Available Item Components................................Spec-2
1.5 Product Specifications.............................................................Spec-2
1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity..............................Spec-3
1.7 Moving Means for the Machine................................................Spec-3
1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine.............................................Spec-4
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine by Use of the Anti-Drop Retainer................Spec-4
1.9 Environmental Conditions........................................................Spec-5
1.10 Electrical Specifications...........................................................Spec-6
1.11 Servicing Space......................................................................Spec-6
1.12 Installation Space....................................................................Spec-7
1.12.1 Installing the Machine on the Table.................................................Spec-7
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Drop Retainer...........................Spec-8
1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used......Spec-8
1.12.4 Using the Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon...................Spec-9
1.13 Disposal................................................................................Spec-10
1.13.1 Disposal of IP................................................................................Spec-10

Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.5
Machine Description (MD)
1. Machine Overview...................................................MD-1 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations.................MD-13

1.1 Features.................................................................................... MD-1 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function.................... MD-13
1.2 System Configuration................................................................ MD-1 3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit and
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names............. MD-2 the Components to Be Protected.................................................... MD-13
1.3.1 External View of Machine.................................................................. MD-2 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected.................................. MD-13
1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions............................................................ MD-2 3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram................................ MD-14
1.4 Machine Components................................................................ MD-4 3.2 Erasure Unit Control................................................................ MD-15
1.4.1 Unit Locations................................................................................... MD-4 3.3 LEDs on the SND37A Board and the CPU37A Board.............. MD-16
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths.......................................... MD-4 3.3.1 LEDs on the SND37A Board........................................................... MD-16
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions................................. MD-5 3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU37A Board........................................................... MD-17
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit.............................................................................. MD-5 3.4 Checking the Voltage............................................................... MD-18
1.5.2 Conveyor Unit/Subscanning Unit...................................................... MD-7 3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of
the PSU37B Board/PSU37A Power Supply.................................... MD-18
1.6 Board Locations........................................................................ MD-8
1.6.1 Housing............................................................................................. MD-8 4. Descriptions of
1.6.2 Erasure Unit...................................................................................... MD-8 Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation...............MD-19
1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit......................................................................... MD-8
4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence........................... MD-19
1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit.......................................................................... MD-8
4.2 Correction Data....................................................................... MD-20
1.6.5 Subscanning Unit.............................................................................. MD-9
4.3 Image Data Flow..................................................................... MD-21
2. Descriptions of Software Control........................MD-10 4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem.................................... MD-22
2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console....................................... MD-10
2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing............................................. MD-10
2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data.......................................................... MD-10
2.2 Error Handling..........................................................................MD-11
2.3 What Is Sleep Mode?...............................................................MD-11
2.4 RU Bootup Processing............................................................ MD-12
2.5 RU Termination Processing...................................................... MD-12
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.6
5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components and

Their Operations....................................................MD-23
5.1 IP Conveyance Flow................................................................ MD-23
5.2 Conveyance Operation............................................................ MD-23
5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation.......................................................... MD-23
5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation.......................................................... MD-26
5.3 Erasure Unit............................................................................ MD-28
5.4 Conveyor Unit......................................................................... MD-28
5.5 Subscanning Unit.................................................................... MD-29
5.5.1 IP Reading...................................................................................... MD-29
5.5.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading.................................................. MD-30

Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1

1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting..............................................................MT-1
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log..................................................MT-2
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log......................................................................MT-2
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble...................MT-3
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table.......................................................MT-4
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch.........................................MT-6
2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7

3. Detail Code............................................................. MT-44
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code...............................................MT-44
4. Abnormal Images.................................................. MT-45

4.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images............................................MT-45

Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.8
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit.......MC-1 4.6 CPU Board.............................................................................. MC-16

1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment............... MC-1 4.6.1 Replacement Procedures................................................................ MC-16
1.2 Types of Screws........................................................................ MC-1 4.6.2 Machine Data Backup..................................................................... MC-16
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding............................................ MC-1 4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board............................................................... MC-18
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance...................... MC-1 4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console........................... MC-22
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image............................ MC-1 4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version................................................. MC-23
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data............................................................ MC-26
2. Table of Contents....................................................MC-2 4.6.7 Confirming the S Value................................................................... MC-27
3. Cover........................................................................MC-4 4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize.................................................... MC-27
3.1 Cover........................................................................................ MC-4 4.7 SND Board.............................................................................. MC-28
3.2 Board Box Cover....................................................................... MC-5 4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly.................................................. MC-30
3.3 Left-hand Side Plate.................................................................. MC-5 4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet....................... MC-31
3.4 Bottom Cover............................................................................ MC-6 4.10 Fan (FAN1).............................................................................. MC-33
3.5 Back-Top Plate.......................................................................... MC-7 5. Cassette Set Unit...................................................MC-34
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate..................................................................... MC-8 5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4).............................................. MC-34
3.7 Top Plate................................................................................... MC-9 5.2 Shutter.................................................................................... MC-35
3.8 PNL Board............................................................................... MC-10 5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket.......................................................... MC-36
4. Housing Unit..........................................................MC-11 5.4 Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)............................. MC-37
4.1 Duct (Right)..............................................................................MC-11 5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly................................. MC-38
4.2 Duct (Left)................................................................................MC-11 5.6 Arm (White: Reference Side)................................................... MC-39
4.3 Power Supply Assembly.......................................................... MC-12 5.7 Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side).................................... MC-40
4.4 PSU37A Power Supply............................................................ MC-14 5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3)............................................. MC-40
4.5 PSU37B Board........................................................................ MC-15 5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1)......................................... MC-41
5.10 Guide (Small).......................................................................... MC-42
5.11 Inch/Metric Detection Sensor (SA16)....................................... MC-43
5.12 Guide (Large).......................................................................... MC-43
5.13 HR Cassette Size Sensor Assembly (SA10)............................ MC-44 5.37 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor (MA5)..................... MC-70
5.14 IP Suction Arm......................................................................... MC-45 5.38 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Guide Driving Gear........... MC-71
5.15 IP Pressdown Roller Assembly................................................ MC-46
6. Erasure Unit...........................................................MC-72
5.16 Suction Cup ............................................................................ MC-47
6.1 Erasure Unit............................................................................ MC-72
5.17 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)........................................................ MC-49
6.2 Reflection Plate....................................................................... MC-73
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2).................................................... MC-50
6.3 Filter........................................................................................ MC-74
5.19 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)..................................... MC-50
5.20 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side).... MC-51 7. Conveyor Unit........................................................MC-75
5.21 IP Suction Pump (PA1)............................................................ MC-52 7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side)....................... MC-75
5.22 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1)............................................. MC-53 7.2 Turn Grip Roller Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1)......................... MC-75
5.23 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), 7.3 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1).............................. MC-76
IP Sensor Retaining Bracket.................................................... MC-53 7.4 Conveyor Grip Driving/Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC2).... MC-77
5.24 Roller (Small) Assembly........................................................... MC-54 7.5 Rubber Rollers (A, B)............................................................... MC-78
5.25 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side).................................... MC-55 7.6 Rubber Rollers (C, D).............................................................. MC-80
5.26 Cassette Set Base Assemblies................................................ MC-56 7.7 Rubber Roller (E)..................................................................... MC-82
5.27 Side-Positioning Motor (MA2).................................................. MC-59 7.8 Conveyor Guide Assembly...................................................... MC-84
5.28 Solenoid (SOLA1).................................................................... MC-60 7.9 Grip Release Shaft.................................................................. MC-85
5.29 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8).......................................... MC-61 7.10 Rubber Roller (F)..................................................................... MC-87
5.30 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9)................................ MC-62 7.11 IP Sensor (SC3)...................................................................... MC-88
5.31 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Guide Plates, Stopper................... MC-63 7.12 Antistatic Member.................................................................... MC-89
5.32 Small Size Cassette Guide Plates, Stopper............................. MC-64
8. Light-Collecting Unit.............................................MC-90
5.33 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly............................................. MC-65
8.1 Light-Collecting Unit................................................................. MC-90
5.34 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor Assembly................ MC-67
8.2 PMT Board.............................................................................. MC-93
5.35 Side-positioning Detection Sensor (SA11)................................ MC-68
5.36 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Guide 9. Scanning Optics Unit............................................MC-94
HP Detection Sensor (SA12)................................................... MC-69 9.1 Scanning Optics Unit............................................................... MC-94

10. Subscanning Unit..................................................MC-98 11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations.........MC-125
10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly.................................. MC-98 11.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures................. MC-125
10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1).............................................. MC-100 11.2 CPU Board Fuses................................................................. MC-126
10.3 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and 11.3 SND Board Fuses................................................................. MC-126
Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly.............................MC-101 11.4 PSU37B Board Fuses........................................................... MC-127
10.4 Subscanning Grip Assembly.................................................. MC-103
12. List of Jigs and Tools..........................................MC-128
10.5 Kapton Belt............................................................................ MC-106
12.1 Jigs and Tools........................................................................ MC-128
10.6 Tensioner.............................................................................. MC-106
10.7 Flywheel (Large).................................................................... MC-107
10.8 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1).................................................... MC-108
10.9 Rubber Belt........................................................................... MC-109
10.10 Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft)...................................... MC-109
10.11 Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft)................................................MC-110
10.12 Center Roller.......................................................................... MC-111
10.13 Rubber Roller (G)...................................................................MC-113
10.14 Guide (A)................................................................................MC-115
10.15 Rubber Roller (H)...................................................................MC-116
10.16 Rubber Roller (I).....................................................................MC-118
10.17 Guide (B)............................................................................... MC-120
10.13 Rubber Roller (J)....................................................................MC-121
10.19 Light-collecting Mirror............................................................. MC-123

Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.11
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1. RU PC-TOOL............................................................MU-1 2. Client PC................................................................MU-25

1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree....................................... MU-1 2.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC................................ MU-25
1.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window.............................................................. MU-1 2.1.1 Features of the Client PC................................................................ MU-25
1.1.2 Tree Diagram.................................................................................... MU-1 2.1.2 Operations of the Client PC............................................................ MU-26
1.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL............................................. MU-2 2.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC................................................ MU-27
1.3 Maintenance Mode.................................................................... MU-2 2.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive.... MU-27
1.4 LIST OF EXISTING RU............................................................. MU-3 2.1.5 Precautions in Setting the Console................................................. MU-27
1.5 NEW......................................................................................... MU-3 2.2 Setting Up the Client PC.......................................................... MU-28
1.6 DELETE.................................................................................... MU-4 2.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM............... MU-28
1.7 MUTL........................................................................................ MU-4 2.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive..... MU-28
1.8 PING......................................................................................... MU-5 2.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL...................................................... MU-29
1.9 MON......................................................................................... MU-6 2.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification.............. MU-30
1.10 FTP........................................................................................... MU-7 2.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List........................................... MU-31
1.11 INSTALL.................................................................................... MU-8 2.5.1 RU Registration............................................................................... MU-31
1.12 VERSION UP.......................................................................... MU-10 2.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE.......................................................... MU-32
1.13 EDIT HISTORY....................................................................... MU-12 2.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations............... MU-32
1.14 EDIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................... MU-13 2.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode........................................................... MU-33
1.15 EDIT CL NAME....................................................................... MU-15 2.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode......................................................... MU-34
1.16 BACKUP................................................................................. MU-16 2.7 Data Flow of Each Command.................................................. MU-35
1.17 RESTORE............................................................................... MU-17 2.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD............................................................ MU-35
1.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT............................................................... MU-18 2.7.2 READ and WRITE........................................................................... MU-35
1.19 ERROR DB............................................................................. MU-19 2.7.3 Import and Export............................................................................ MU-35
1.20 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs............................................................. MU-20 2.8 Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after
1.21 VERSION UP: ALL RUs........................................................... MU-21 Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation................................... MU-36
2.8.1 Solution-1........................................................................................ MU-37
1.22 CDPath................................................................................... MU-22
2.8.2 Solution-2........................................................................................ MU-37
1.23 Initialize APL............................................................................ MU-24
2.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL.................................................... MU-38 3.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT............................................................... MU-53
2.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM............... MU-39 3.19 ERROR DB............................................................................. MU-53
2.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive.... MU-39 3.20 READ...................................................................................... MU-54
2.10 Checking the Console Setup when Using the Client PC........... MU-40 3.21 WRITE.................................................................................... MU-55
2.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC.......... MU-41 3.22 UPLOAD................................................................................. MU-56
3.23 DOWNLOAD........................................................................... MU-57
3. CLIENT PC-TOOL..................................................MU-42
3.24 CDPath................................................................................... MU-58
3.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree.............................. MU-42
3.25 Export..................................................................................... MU-58
3.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window.................................................... MU-42
3.26 Import...................................................................................... MU-59
3.1.2 Tree Diagram.................................................................................. MU-42
3.27 OnLine.................................................................................... MU-59
3.2 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL.................................... MU-43
3.28 Network................................................................................... MU-60
3.3 Maintenance Mode.................................................................. MU-43
3.4 Hospital List............................................................................. MU-44 4. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions................MU-61
3.5 NEW RU................................................................................. MU-44 4.1 Tree of MUTL.......................................................................... MU-61
3.6 DELETE.................................................................................. MU-45 4.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL................................................. MU-64
3.7 COPY...................................................................................... MU-45 4.3 Details of MUTL....................................................................... MU-66
3.8 RENAME................................................................................. MU-46 [1] Network Address............................................................................. MU-66
3.9 GET VERSION........................................................................ MU-46 [2] Conveyance Check......................................................................... MU-67
3.10 MUTL...................................................................................... MU-47 [3] Board Check................................................................................... MU-68
3.11 PING....................................................................................... MU-47 [3-1] CPU Board Setting Display............................................................. MU-68
3.12 MON....................................................................................... MU-48 [3-2] Panel Check.................................................................................... MU-69
3.13 FTP......................................................................................... MU-49 [3-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off......................................................................... MU-69
3.14 VERSION UP.......................................................................... MU-50 [3-2-2] BUZZER On/Off.............................................................................. MU-69
3.15 EDIT HISTORY....................................................................... MU-51 [4] Software Check............................................................................... MU-70
3.16 EDIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................... MU-51 [4-1] Ver. Display..................................................................................... MU-70
3.17 EDIT CL NAME....................................................................... MU-52 [4-2] MAC Address Display..................................................................... MU-70

[5] Virtual Image Check........................................................................ MU-71 [6-5-3-2] Sensitivity Correction (HR)............................................................ MU-91
[5-1] LED Virtual Read............................................................................ MU-71 [6-5-4] Special Sensitivity Correction.......................................................... MU-92
[5-2] PMT Virtual Read............................................................................ MU-72 [6-5-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction......................................................... MU-95
[6] Scanner Check................................................................................ MU-73 [6-5-5-1] Existing S-Value............................................................................. MU-95
[6-1] Polygon Motor................................................................................. MU-73 [6-5-5-2] Expected S-Value.......................................................................... MU-95
[6-2] Laser............................................................................................... MU-74 [6-6] Trouble Shooting............................................................................. MU-96
[6-3] HV Diagnostic................................................................................. MU-75 [6-6-1] Shading Correction......................................................................... MU-96
[6-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic..................................................................... MU-75 [6-7] HV ON/OFF..................................................................................... MU-96
[6-4] Format Adjustment.......................................................................... MU-76 [6-8] S Value............................................................................................ MU-97
[6-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)............................................................ MU-77 [6-8-1] S Value Now.................................................................................... MU-97
[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel).............................................................. MU-79 [6-8-2] S Value Calculate............................................................................ MU-97
[6-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line)............................................................... MU-81 [6-8-3] PMT/Light Guide Change................................................................ MU-98
[6-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel).......................................................... MU-83 [6-8-3-1] LED Initialize.................................................................................. MU-98
[6-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ)................................................................... MU-85 [7] For Design....................................................................................... MU-98
[6-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel)..................................................................... MU-85
Appendix.1 Procedures for
[6-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ)...................................................................... MU-85
[6-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel)........................................................................ MU-85 Changing the RU IP Address........Appx MU-1
[6-5] Correction........................................................................................ MU-86 Appendix.2 Procedures for Changing
[6-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction........................................................ MU-86
the IP Address of the FTP Server
[6-5-1-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)............................................... MU-86
[6-5-1-2] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (HR).............................................. MU-87 Registered in RU............................Appx MU-2
[6-5-2] Shading Speed Correction.............................................................. MU-88
Appendix.3 Procedures for Returning
[6-5-2-1] HR................................................................................................. MU-88
[6-5-2-2] ST (GR)......................................................................................... MU-89
the IP Address and
[6-5-3] Sensitivity Correction...................................................................... MU-90 FTP Server Address Specified in
[6-5-3-1] Sensitivity Correction (ST)............................................................. MU-90 the RU to the Default Values.........Appx MU-3

Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.14
Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List............................................................SP-1 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE...............................................SP-29
INDEX.................................................................................................SP-2 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring..........................SP-30
01A COVER 1...................................................................................SP-3
01B COVER 2...................................................................................SP-4
02A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1...........................................................SP-5
02B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2...........................................................SP-6
02C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3...........................................................SP-7
02D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4...........................................................SP-8
02E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5...........................................................SP-9
02F CASSETTE SET UNIT 6.........................................................SP-10
03 ERASURE UNIT...................................................................... SP-11
04A CONVEYOR UNIT 1................................................................SP-12
04B CONVEYOR UNIT 2................................................................SP-13
04C CONVEYOR UNIT 3................................................................SP-14
05 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT......................................................SP-15
06 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT.....................................................SP-16
07A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1.........................................................SP-17
07B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2.........................................................SP-18
07C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3.........................................................SP-19
07D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4.........................................................SP-20
07E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5.........................................................SP-21
07F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6.........................................................SP-22
08 CONTROLLER........................................................................SP-23
09 OPTION...................................................................................SP-24
10 CABLE.....................................................................................SP-25
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM................................................................SP-26

Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.15
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. How to Use 7. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-13

the Preventive Maintenance Section.....................PM-1 7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit.......................................................PM-13
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List....................................... PM-2 7.2 Cleaning the Filter.....................................................................PM-13
1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when 7.3 Replacing the Filter...................................................................PM-14
the Machine Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or 7.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate....................................................PM-14
when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached... PM-4
8. Cassette Set Unit...................................................PM-15
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when
8.1 Cleaning the Roller (Small).......................................................PM-15
the Machine Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or
when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached........... PM-5 8.2 Cleaning the Suction Cups.......................................................PM-15
8.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.....................................................PM-16
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures.......................PM-7 8.4 Cleaning the Shutter.................................................................PM-17
2.1 Backing Up the Log................................................................... PM-7 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit.....................................................PM-17
2.2 Checking the Error Log.............................................................. PM-8
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................................. PM-9
9. Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-18
9.1 Removing the Bottom Cover.....................................................PM-18
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-10 9.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly...........PM-18
4. Pulling Out the Machine....................................... PM-11 9.3 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit...........................................PM-18
9.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-18
5. Removing the Covers...........................................PM-12 9.5 Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Unit.........................................PM-19
5.1 Removing the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years).................................PM-12 9.6 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly....PM-19
5.2 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Years)......................................PM-12 9.7 Reinstalling the Bottom Cover...................................................PM-19
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-12 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-20
11. Greasing Up...........................................................PM-20
11.1 Greasing Up the Movable Guide.............................................. PM-20

Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.16
12. Reinstalling the Covers and

Cleaning the Covers..............................................PM-20
12.1 Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years).............................. PM-20
12.2 Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)................................... PM-20
12.3 Cleaning the Covers................................................................ PM-20
13. Securing the Machine...........................................PM-20

14. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding....PM-21
15. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-21
16. Confirming the S Value.........................................PM-21
17. Checking the Error Log........................................PM-21

Contents Installation (IN) 0.17
Installation (IN)
1. Specifications of the Machine..................................IN-1 8. Installing the RU PC-TOOL.....................................IN-16

8.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL........................................................ IN-19
2. Installation Work Flowchart.....................................IN-2
8.2 Uninstalling the RU PC-TOOL.................................................... IN-21
3. Preparation for Installation.......................................IN-3
9. Installing the RU Software......................................IN-23
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation............................................... IN-3
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements............................................................ IN-3 10. Starting Up the RU..................................................IN-24
3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................... IN-3
11. Changing the RU and FTP Server Settings...........IN-24
3.1.3 Precautions for System Connection (Outside Japan)......................... IN-3
3.2 Unloading.................................................................................... IN-4 12. Image/Conveyance Checks....................................IN-25
3.2.1 Unloading (Only in USA)..................................................................... IN-5 12.1 Preparations.............................................................................. IN-25
3.2.2 Unloading (Outside Japan and USA).................................................. IN-7 12.2 Image/Conveyance Checks....................................................... IN-26
3.3 Transfer....................................................................................... IN-9
3.4 Temporary Placement.................................................................. IN-9
13. Confirming the S Value...........................................IN-28
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied..................................................... IN-10 13.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST........................................ IN-28
13.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR....................................... IN-30
4. Installation Procedures...........................................IN-11
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member.......................IN-11
14. Powering OFF the Console/RU..............................IN-32
5. Connecting the Cables...........................................IN-12 15. Cleaning the Console/RU.......................................IN-32

5.1 Checking the Power Cable........................................................ IN-12
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable.................................................. IN-13
6. Final Placement.......................................................IN-14
6.1 Securing the Machine................................................................ IN-14
6.2 Connecting and Retaining the Power Cable............................... IN-14
7. Installing the Console.............................................IN-15

Contents Installation (IN) 0.18
Appendix 1. Installing in the Patient Environment....... Appx IN-1 8. Securing the Stand Wagon............................................... Appx IN-19
1. Installing in the Patient Environment................................... Appx IN-1 8.1 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Floor........................................ Appx IN-19
8.2 Fixing the Stand Wagon on the Wall........................................ Appx IN-20
Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with 8.3 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Additional Stand for LCD........ Appx IN-22
the Anti-Drop Retainer............................... Appx IN-2
Appendix 4. Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in
1. Components....................................................................... Appx IN-2
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Drop Retainer.............. Appx IN-2
Respective Fixing Modes........................ Appx IN-23
Appendix 3. Assembling and Securing Appendix 5. Embedding the Anchor Nut.................... Appx IN-24
the Stand Wagon and Appendix 6. Vehicle Mounting Procedures................. Appx IN-25
Additional Stand for LCD.......................... Appx IN-4 1. Installing the Equipment.................................................... Appx IN-25
1. Components....................................................................... Appx IN-5 2. When Moving the Vehicle................................................. Appx IN-25
2. Assembling the Additional Stand for LCD............................ Appx IN-9 3. When Using the Equipment.............................................. Appx IN-25
3. Installing the Optional Items for the Stand Wagon............. Appx IN-10
3.1 Installing the Guide Bracket for Long Cassette........................ Appx IN-10
4. Installing the Optional Items for the Additional Stand for LCD....Appx IN-11
4.1 Mounting the Arm..................................................................... Appx IN-11
4.2 Installing the Base.................................................................... Appx IN-11
4.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack and the Rack for Long Cassette.... Appx IN-12
5. Applying the Seal............................................................. Appx IN-13
6. Fixing the Machine........................................................... Appx IN-14
7. Securing the Additional Stand for LCD.............................. Appx IN-15
7.1 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD to the Floor (Anchor Nut).... Appx IN-15
7.2 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Screw)......... Appx IN-16
7.3 Fixing the Additional stand for LCD on the Wall
(Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type))......................................... Appx IN-17

Contents Performance Check (PC) 0.19
Performance Check (PC)
CR-IR 392 Performance Check List............................. PC-1

Installation Information.........................................................................PC-1
Checklist..............................................................................................PC-1

0.20
BLANK PAGE

0.21
BLANK PAGE

0.22
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Revision
Issue date Reason Pages affected
number
11.05.2014 01 New release (FM9245) All pages
CR-IR 392 Service Manual
Safety Precaution
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual

Safety-1
1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts

l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch.
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible
l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
1.1 General Precautions carelessly).
l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
WARNING switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
No modification of this equipment is allowed. n Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the
erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the
n Electrical System Components/Parts inside of a broken part.
- Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the
n Other Working Precautions
machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged, you
may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even when l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing procedures, Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, protective housings back exactly where they were.
as instructed in this manual. l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your body. If because of possible electric shock hazards.
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic components l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise
due care against electric shock or other hazards.
on the board. l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
- Do not connect any unspecified device. because you may suffer burns.
- Ensure sufficient space around the power plug or the inlet. l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to
wear an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body.
n Drive System Components/Parts Static electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, and other drive mechanism l Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or
retainers.
parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and another label over them.
clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
n Heavy Objects have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and n Grounding
installation of heavy objects. Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
n Safety Devices
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, panels, and covers) should always be restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may impair their safety to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
features. that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Safety-1

Safety-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment
As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the right-hand side cover Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the hospital’s
of the machine, this is the machine of Class 1, which complies with “ Laser Products - director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient environment or
Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff not.
(Laser Notice No. 50).” The image reader incorporates a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor
laser wavelength of 659 nm, red visible light) with a maximum output of 68.2 mW (maximum 1.3.1 Additional Protective Grounding
output of 130 mW under fault conditions), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you
perform tasks as instructed in the service manual. If the machine is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the
non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
n Precautions Against Laser Exposure Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used room"
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. are given below.
l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure l Patient environment

When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the removed tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a in height from the area of the patient’s body.
laser beam out of the machine. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit.
l Medically-used room
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts.
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs
room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room. Generally, a portion of the
described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified.
medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure l Non-medically used room
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you may
be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.

Safety-3
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine 1.5 Notes on Additional Stand for LCD Use
The installation space and the method of retaining the machine are limited in a site where a
long cassette is used. 1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where
the Additional Stand for LCD Is Used
WARNING
Exercise care in the following when working in a user’s site where the additional stand for
l Be sure to follow the precautions below in a site where a long cassette is used.
LCD (Available Item) is used.
- Use a table which can retain the machine and support the long cassette's weight.
Placing extraordinary pressure on the long cassette inserted into the machine CAUTION
may cause injury or damage the machine.
- Install the machine at a place where the space in front of the machine is 1000mm When pushing the machine into the additional stand for LCD or pulling the machine
or more. out of the additional stand for LCD, exercise care so that your fingers are not caught
between the additional stand for LCD and machine.
1.5.2 Cautions in Using the Additional Stand for LCD

It is important to note the followings when using the additional stand for LCD (Available Item).
CAUTION
Since the optional additional stand for LCD or the cassette rack is for exclusive use of
the machine, do not use for other purposes. Do not use the additional stand for LCD in
manners other than mentioned in the Operation Manual, such as used as a stool or a
chair, or putting on an object other than specified.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not impact the additional stand for LCD while reading the image. Otherwise, image
abnormality might result.
l When using this equipment on a vehicle, secure a rack for fall-prevention, and
secure the equipment and the rack with the anti-drop retainer (option). 1.5.3 Precautions in
Preventing the Additional Stand for LCD from Toppling
Refer to the following for retaining the additional stand for LCD to prevent the supporter from
toppling.
{IN:Appendix 3-7._Securing the Additional Stand for LCD}

Safety-4
2. Labels
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations

Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution
labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-
22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff (Laser Notice No. 50).” issued by the FDA of the U.S.
a: IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label

b: HHS Certification and Identification Label

Safety-5
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels n IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label
n HHS Certification and Identification Label

Safety-6
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels 2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations
n Attachment Position 2.3.1 Scanning Optics Unit

Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the scanning optics unit.
n Ratings Indication Labels
l For use outside Japan

Safety-7
2.3.2 Covers
u NOTE u
Always use a cable conforming to the specifications at a position with a caution label applied.
IEC60601-1 9.4.2.3
compliance Label
Additional protective
ground mark
Cassette right
adjust label
Refer to Instruction
Manual/Booklet Label
PRTM01Sa02006.ai
Refer to Instruction
Manual/Booklet Label PRTM01Sa02004.ai

Safety-8
2.3.3 Dummy Cassette (For Mobile) 2.3.4 Erasure Unit
PRT03Sa02001.ai
u NOTE u
There are two types of the dummy cassettes. Since the type without protrusions is for
mammography, be sure not to make mistake.

Safety-9
2.4 Safety and Symbols
The safety symbols used in CR-IR 392 are as follows.
Symbol Remarks
High temperature
OFF (Power)
ON (Power)
Protective ground mark
AC
Recycle the waste from electrical and electronic equipment separately
Year of Manufacture
Chinese Environmental Regulations

(Expiration date before when the chemical substance included in this product
does not affect the environment)
Stand-by switch
No sitting
Refer to Instruction Manual/Booklet

Safety-10
3. Protective Housings against

Laser Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, a laser beam will never leak
out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical
path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other
people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the
protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
n Protective Housing of the Machine
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The four covers
marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure.

Safety-11
4. CLASSIFICATION
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock

NO APPLIED PART
3. Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter

IP00
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a

flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5. According to the mode of operation

CONTINUOUS OPERATION

Safety-12
5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2/EN60601-1-2

- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be
installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as follows.
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices to - The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
the IEC60601-1-2 and the EN60601-1-2 required in the MDD93/42/EEC. exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement parts
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the
typical medical installation. machine.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
PART NO. General Specification
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other
devices in the vicinity. 136N0427 (USA)
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Power Cable 136N0450 (UK)
136N0377 (Europe)
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be determined
by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference Cat5E or more.
I/F Cable -
by one or more of the following measures; Straight cable of UTP type.
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device. - The machine should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
- Increase the separation between the equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the machine should be observed to verify normal
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The machine uses RF energy only for
its internal function. Therefore, its RF
RF emissions
Group 1 emissions are very low and are not likely to
CISPR 11
cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions
Class B
CISPR 11
The machine is suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and
Class B (*1)
IEC 61000-3-2 those directly connected to the public low-
voltage power supply network that supplies
Voltage fluctuations/flicker buildings used for domestic purposes.
emissions Complies (*1)
IEC 61000-3-3
*1: The applicable ranges for the harmonic emissions IEC61000-3-2 and voltage fluctuations/flicker
emissions IEC61000-3-3 cover those machines with power supply voltage of 220 V or higher, and
they are not applicable to machines with the power supply voltage less than 220 V. Therefore,
they are considered to be “not applicable” to the machines with the power supply voltage less
than 220 V, with which most of the machines for use in Japan are concerned.

Safety-13
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic IEC 60601 test Compliance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment - Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level level
guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to
(ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - 80MHz any part of the machine, including cables,
±8kV air ±6kV contact ceramic tile. If floors than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 are covered with calculated from the equation applicable to
±2kV air synthetic material, the frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air the relative humidity
±8kV air should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%.
Electrical fast transient/ ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 P
burst lines lines should be that of a
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - d = 1.2 P 80 MHz - 800 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines or hospital 2.5GHz
environment. d = 2.3 P 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
Surge ±1kV Line to Line ±1kV Line to Line Mains power quality
should be that of a where P is the maximum output power rating
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV Line to Ground ±2kV Line to Ground typical commercial of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
or hospital the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
environment. recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial as determined by an electromagnetic site
power supply input or hospital survey,a should be less than the compliance
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT environment. If level in each frequency range.b
(60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) the user of the
IEC 61000-4-11 machine requires Interference may occur in the vicinity of
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation equipment marked with the following symbol:
during power mains
70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the machine be
powered from an
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT uninterruptible power NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery. NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
for 5 s for 5 s
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
field should be at levels environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
characteristic of a considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the machine is used
IEC 61000-4-8 typical location in a exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the machine should be observed to verify normal
typical commercial operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
or hospital such as reorienting or relocating the machine.
environment.
b
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.

Safety-14
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the machine
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated
RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the machine can help
prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the machine as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter

output power of m
transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation
is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Safety-15
6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing equipment
and IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply with
the system standard IEC 60601-1-1:2000 and IEC 60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part
configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the
requirements of IEC 60601-1-1:2000 and IEC 60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local representative.

Safety-16
7. Cautions on Network
- Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other
systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network
separation.
- After modifying the network, confirm that the system is not affected. If it is affected, take
appropriate countermeasures including:
- Replacing connected device
- Connecting additional devices
- Removing devices
- Updating devices
- Upgrading devices

Safety-17
BLANK PAGE

Safety-18
BLANK PAGE

Safety-19
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Revision
Issue date Reason Pages affected
number
Product Specifications

Spec-1
1. Specifications of the Machine 1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes
u NOTE u
1.1 Product Code Do not use the cassettes or IPs which are not specified to the machine.
Use the cassettes or IPs which are not specified may cause trouble or failure.
n Machine Main Body

Abbreviated product name Destination Qty. Remarks n Cassette CC (ST Cassette)
CR IR 392 RU2 M PNTM = : E Outside USA and Japan 1 Made in China - Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10, 15 x 30
- Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
n Cassette LC (Long Cassette)
l Twin cassette
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types - Inch (inch): 14 x 17-twin, 10 x 12-twin
- Metric (cm): 24 x 30-twin
n Available IP Types l Triple cassette
- ST-VI type - Inch (inch): 14 x 17-triple, 14 x 14-triple, 10 x 12-triple
- HR-VI type
n Cassette CH (HR Cassette)
n Available IP Sizes - Metric (cm): 18 x 24, 24 x 30
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10, 15 x 30
- Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
u NOTE u
Use a adapter when having 24 x 30 HR cassette read.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Spec-1

Spec-2
1.4 Optional Item/Available Item Components 1.5 Product Specifications
n Optional Items n Maximum Heat Generation

Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks Standby: 0.36 MJ/h or less
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E Power cable 1 For use in Great Britain Operating: 0.62 MJ/h or less
Hibernation: 0.07 MJ/h or less
For use in European
countries other than the n Noise
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E Power cable 1
Great Britain, and for
other overseas countries During idling: 50 dB or less
When in use: 55 dB or less
For retaining the
IR 392 TABLE FIX KIT = #(E) Anti-Drop Retainer kit 1 Single sound: 65 dB or less
machine
n Warm-up Time
■ Available Item
l In case only RU is started
Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks
30 seconds or less
IR 392 ADD STAND FOR LCD = #(E) Additional Stand for LCD 1 *1
l Recovery from the Sleep mode
IR 392 STAND WAGON = #(E) Stand Wagon 1
25 seconds or less
IR 391 CASSETTE RACK = #(E) Cassette rack 1 *1
n I/F cable
IR 355 CASSETTE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1 *1
UTP cable of straight type and category 5E or more
IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm 1 *1
Wall-retaining fitting
IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) 1 *1
(long type)
IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 *1
For Europe
IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1
*1
IR 392 SUPPORT BAR FOR LC = #(E) Support Bar for LC 1
- Dedicated to PRIMA
Dummy cassette for Tm
IR DUMMY CASSETTE FOR M MBL E 1
mobile - Enclosed to the
Operation Manual
*1 Additional Stand for LCD and its options are not UL certified.

Spec-3
1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity 1.7 Moving Means for the Machine
Move the machine by raising it up.
n Dimensions
u INSTRUCTION u
W560×D540×H392 (mm) (except protrusions)
Always work in pairs.
n Weight
Approx 39 kg (86.0 lb).

Spec-4
1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine u INSTRUCTION u
When you stand the machine on the anti-drop retainer, be sure to pull out the machine to the
To retain the machine, use the anti-drop retainer. position indicated in the following figure before standing the machine. When the machine
is stood at a position other than the one indicated in the following figure, the cover of the
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine by Use of the Anti-Drop Retainer machine might get damaged by the anti-drop retainer.
Under the following circumstance, use the anti-drop retainer (optional) to retain the machine.
- When requested by the institute
REFERENCE
Out of eight screw holes on the base plate, four outer holes are spare ones.

Spec-5
1.9 Environmental Conditions n Vibration Conditions
l Conditions for Vibration for Floor (Machine Surface)

n Climate Conditions 10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.015 mm or less in amplitude
l Operating l Conditions for Vibration Test for Vehicle

Temperature: 15°C to 30°C - Vertical direction
Relative humidity: 15% to 80% (without moisture condensation) 5 - 20Hz 0.002 - 0.002 PSD
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa 20 - 30Hz 0.002 - 0.0001 PSD
30 - 500Hz 0.0001 - 0.0001 PSD
Total Energy: 0.3grms
- Anteroposterior or horizontal direction
5 - 25Hz 0.0006 - 0.0006 PSD
25 - 30Hz 0.0006 - 0.00007 PSD
30 - 500Hz 0.00007 - 0.00007 PSD
Total Energy: 0.21grms
- Test time
24 hours for each direction (corresponds to 300,000km-driving)
PSD: Power Spectrum Density (g2/Hz)

l Non-operating
Temperature: 0 to 45°C (should not freeze) n Floor Levelness
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation) 10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
n Floor Flatness
l Transit/storage
Temperature: -10 to 50°C (should not freeze) 10 mm/m or less
Relative humidity: 10% RH (-10°C) to 90% RH (50°C) (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa

Spec-6
1.10 Electrical Specifications 1.11 Servicing Space
When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.
n Frequency
Single-phase, 50-60 Hz, ±3%
n Input Voltage
l For Japan
Single-phase, 100 V~ ±10%
l For other than Japan

Single-phase, 100-240 V~ ±10%
n Rated Amperage
l For Japan
Single-phase, 100 V~, 50-60 Hz : 1.9 A
l For other than Japan

Single-phase, 100-240 V~, 50-60 Hz : 1.9-0.8A
n Power Consumption
Operating: 170 VA or less
Standby: 100 VA or less
Remote standby: 60 VA or less
n Grounding
Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less)
n Overload Protection
10 A

Spec-7
1.12 Installation Space l Side
u NOTE u
Do not lean anything such as books, cassettes or films against nearly to the vent hole of the
machine. It may hinder to exhaust heat.
1.12.1 Installing the Machine on the Table
l Upper
* This space is for viewing the LED of operation panel. You can set up the space longer than
500mm if without any trouble viewing the LED.
* This space is for operating the main power switch, for connecting the power cable or for venting.

Spec-8
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Drop Retainer 1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used
When using the long cassette, use a table which can retain the machine and support the
l Installation space when retained by anti-drop retainer long cassette's weight. Placing extraordinary pressure on the long cassette inserted into the
machine may cause injury or damage the machine.
l Installation space when using the Long Cassette

For the machine uses long cassette, the space in front of the machine other than the usual
installation space is required.
* This space is for operating the main power switch or for connecting the power cable. If there is
no interference with the operation of main power switch or power cable connection, the space
can be 100 mm (4.0 in.) or less.
l Location of holes for the anti-drop retainer

Spec-9
1.12.4 Using the Additional Stand for LCD and Stand Wagon l Installation space required when
the mount is attached to the additional stand for LCD
l Installation space required for the additional stand for LCD only The mount mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.
l Installation space required when l Installation space required for the stand wagon only
the cassette rack is attached to the additional stand for LCD
The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.

Spec-10
1.13 Disposal
1.13.1 Disposal of IP
Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in each
country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed.

Spec-11
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
Machine Description (MD)

MD-1
1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration

The network supporting IEEE802.3 and FRUP data communication protocol are used in this
machine.
1.1 Features
u NOTE u
If the network has been cut off due to malfunction in networking device or any other causes,
n Features of the Machine image data cannot be transferred from this machine.
l Target
This machine is intended for small hospital, where a daily process count of IP is between 1 to n System Configuration 1
20. The machine is connected to the Console via a network.
l Improved dust resistance Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
Dust resistance is improved as there is no opening on the machine.
l Power supply
A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to the machine.
n System Configuration 2
l Removal of IP static electricity
IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing attached Connect the machine, Console, and printer via network.
to each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush attached to the IP conveyance Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
path.
l Table top
The table is supposed to be 700mm height.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MD-1

MD-2
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions
Name Function
1.3.1 External View of Machine Operation panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
Eraser button <Function 1>
The button changes over the RU from the reading mode to the erasure
mode. When an IP is to be erased, press the button and change over
from the reading mode to the erasure mode.
<Function 2> *
The button can stop the buzzer sounding while the buzzer sounds with
an error or a high dose detected. The cassette can be removed at this
time.
<Function 3>
Pressing both eraser button and stand-by switch at the same time for
a while , the scanner unit cleaning is performed. Used when white
streaks appear on the image.
Power/erasing mode
indicator lamp Lights up in green when the main power switch is ON. Lights up in
orange when the RU is changed over to the erasure mode.
* Only when "RELEASE ERROR (Mode Button)" in the CONFIGURATION is set to ON.

MD-3
Name Function Name Function
Status display LED Indicates status of the RU. Over x-ray display lamp When a high dose is detected, the buzzer sounds, this lamp and the
cassette removal lamp alternately flash, and the cassette is ejected.
The ejected cassette is incompletely erased.
: During startup
The incompletely erased cassette might cause image problems if used
as it is. Leave the incompletely erased cassette for 16 hours, and
erase it before using.
: End processing
Cassette removal lamp <When flashing alone (in blue)>
The lamp flashes (in blue) when the processed cassette can be
removed. The lamp goes out when the cassette is removed.
: IP processing
<When lights up alternately with the over X-ray display lamp>
The IP is ejected as incompletely erased.
: With the Console connected (online) <When lights up alternately with the cassette ready lamp>
The cassette is ejected as unprocessed.
Cassette ready lamp Lights up (in green) when the patient information is registered in
: Without Console connected (offline) the Console, and the cassette can be read. The cassette cannot
be inserted while this lamp is unlit. When this lamp lights up
alternately with the cassette removal lamp, the cassette is ejected as
: Error/warning indication unprocessed.
A number appears on the LED and flashes.
Stand-by switch <Function 1>
The button turns ON/OFF the power of the machine. Used to start up
If the erasure button or the stand-by switch
the machine alone. Keep pressing the button for approx. 4 seconds to
is pressed while the error/warning indication
turn OFF only the RU power.
Blinking number appears, the error/warning indication can be
canceled. If a plurality of errors occur, every time
<Function 2>
an indication is canceled, another error code
The button can stop the buzzer sounding while the buzzer sounds with
appears.
an error or a high dose detected. The cassette can be removed at this
Only lower three digits of the five-digit error code
time.
appear on the LED.
: Maintenance indication <Function 3>
The “PC” indication flashes on the LED when a Pressing both eraser button and stand-by switch at the same time for
RU PC-TOOL command is carried out. a while , the scanner unit cleaning is performed. Used when white
Pressing the erasure button while pressing the streaks appear on the image.
stand-by switch, the maintenance indication can
Inlet Connects the power cable.
be canceled.
External device connector Used for network-connecting the external device.
(I/F cable) Do not connect telephone lines.
: Cleaning
Main power switch ON ( I ) : Main power ON
OFF ( 0 ) : Main power OFF

MD-4
1.4 Machine Components 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths
1.4.1 Unit Locations

MD-5
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions Symbol Name Type Function
The sensor detects that the cassette is loaded, and is

SA1 Cassette IN sensor PI (5 mm)
in CLOSE state when the cassette is loaded.
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit
The sensor detects that the cassette is held, and is in
SA2 Cassette hold sensor PI (5 mm)
OPEN state when the cassette is held.
The sensor detects that the suction arm is at the
SA3 Suction arm HP sensor PI (5 mm) home position, and is in CLOSE state when the arm
is at the home position.
The sensor detects that the cassette is ejected, is in
Cassette ejection
SA4 PI (5 mm) CLOSE state when the cassette is inserted, and in
sensor
OPEN state when the cassette is ejected.
Measures the IP length according to the time interval
SA5 Separate
from the CLOSE state and OPEN state of the sensor.
(SA5-1, IP length sensor transmitting
SA5-1: Light emitting side
SA5-2) type sensor
SA5-2: Light receiving side
IP protrusion Detects the position of the IP protrusion prevention guide.
SA6 prevention guide PI (5 mm) The IP protrusion prevention pin is protruded when
HP sensor the sensor is in CLOSE state.
Detects the operation position of the side-positioning
guide.
SA7 Side-positioning sensor PI (5 mm) The side-positioning guide depended on the cassette
size in accordance with OPEN/CLOSE state of the
sensor works.
The sensor detects that a small-size cassette is
Small cassette size
SA8 PI (5 mm) loaded, and is in OPEN state when the small-size
sensor
cassette is loaded.
Identifies the 15x30cm IP width cassette.
"15x30 IP width" The sensor is in OPEN state when the 15x30cm IP
SA9 PI (5 mm)
identifying sensor width cassette is inserted, and in CLOSE state when
the cassette in other size is inserted.
HR cassette size The sensor detects that a HR cassette is loaded, and
SA10 PI (5 mm)
sensor is in OPEN state when the HR cassette is loaded.
Detects the position of the inch/metric IP side-
positioning guide.
Side-positioning
SA11 PI (5 mm) The inch/metric IP side-positioning guide is on the
detection sensor
right adjust position (metric) when the sensor is in
CLOSE state.
Detects the position of the inch/metric IP side-
Inch/metric side-
positioning guide.
SA12 positioning guide PI (5 mm)
The inch/metric IP side-positioning guide is lowered
HP detection sensor
when the sensor is in CLOSE state.

MD-6
Symbol Name Type Function
Detects the type of the small-size cassette (inch/metric).

Inch/metric detection It is in OPEN state when the small-size metric
SA16 PI (5 mm)
sensor cassette is loaded and in CLOSE state when the
small-size metric cassette is loaded.
Cassette hold pin Power down Holds/releases the cassette hold pin. The sensor is in
SOLA1
solenoid solenoid OFF state when holding and in ON state when releasing.
Solenoid Feeds the air to the suction cup to leak the IP from
SVA1 IP air leak valve
valve the suction cup. It leaks the IP when turned ON.
PA1 IP suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP. It sucks the IP turned ON.
Suction arm driving Two-phase
MA1 Drives the removal arm.
motor pulse motor
Side-positioning driving
MA2 DC motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism.
motor
Side-positioning inch/
MA5 DC Motor Drives the inch/metric side-positioning guide.
metric switch motor
Power supply unit
FAN1 DC fan Cools the power supply unit.
cooling fan

MD-7
1.5.2 Conveyor Unit/Subscanning Unit Symbol Name Type Function
Turn grip roller Detects that the conveyor unit grip mechanism is at
SC1 PI (5mm)
mechanism HP sensor its home position (HP).
Detects the IP. When the leading edge of IP reaches
this sensor, the signal is sent to the SND board.
Then, the IP conveyance speed changes from
SC3 IP sensor 1 PI (19mm)
normal conveyance speed to reading conveyance
speed.
Sensor becomes CLOSE when IP is detected.
Laser light
IP leading-edge sensor
SZ1 receiving Detects the tip of the IP to be read.
(SED board)
element
Grip release HP Detects that the subscanning unit grip mechanism is
SZ2 PI (5mm)
detection sensor at its home position (HP).
Side-positioning Two-phase
MC1 Conveys the IP.
conveying motor pulse motor
Conveyor grip driving/
Two-phase Drives the grip release mechanism and dust removal
MC2 cleaning guide driving
pulse motor mechanism.
motor (MC2)
Two-phase
MZ1 Subscanning motor Conveys the IP.
pulse motor
Two-phase
MZ2 Soft-grip release motor Drives the subscanning unit soft-grip mechanism.
pulse motor

MD-8
1.6 Board Locations 1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit
1.6.1 Housing
1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit
1.6.2 Erasure Unit

MD-9
1.6.5 Subscanning Unit

MD-10
2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data
u NOTE u l Settable items and default values

The settings are made from the RU PC-TOOL. The settable items and their default values
In this chapter, the "RU Application", "RU IP Address", and "RU Configuration" are referred to
are as follows.
shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
Setup items Setting means Default values
RU IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.10
2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console RU subnet mask RU PC-TOOL 255.255.0.0
The exchange of data between the RU and Console is described below. RU default gateway RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.0
FTP server IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.20
2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
RU secure IP address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
RU secure net address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
l Flow of image data
The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the CPU board, and transferred
l Flow of network setting data
to the Console via the network.
The network setting data is not written into the CPU board only by clicking [SET] button on
l Flow of log data the RU PC-TOOL window. You need click [UPDATE] button to write the network setting data
- The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon into the CPU board.
occurrence of a FATAL error. The contents set from the RU PC-TOOL are stored on the CPU board FLASH ROM.
- The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is reached, Console RU
and, once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis.
Console RU RU PC-TOOL CPU board

Image data
Network setting FLASH ROM
data
FTP server CPU board
COMMON FLASH ROM [SET]
Network setting
Memory (SDRAM) [UPDATE] data
Image data
Log data Log data

FRRB102001.ai
RU-specific data
FRRB102002.ai

MD-11
2.2 Error Handling 2.3 What Is Sleep Mode?
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where it is The "Sleep mode" is such that, in order to save power, the conditions in the
inoperable. machine automatically change to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within
a specified period of time.
n Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP n Operation in the Sleep Mode
reading, the IP is returned to the cassette. Upon entering the Sleep mode, only the power of the CPU board is kept ON, while the power
of other components is left OFF.
n Cases where Retry Is Impossible (FATAL Error) Only the power/erasing mode indicator lamp on the operation panel lights up in green in the
(1) When the function of the CPU board stops. Sleep mode.
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops.
n Transition to the Sleep Mode
l Transition requirements
- If "Sleep mode ON" is set in the CONFIGURATION and the RU is not operated within the
preset "Sleep mode transition time" while the RU remains in READY state, the machine
transits to the Sleep mode.
- The stand-by switch is kept pressed for 4 seconds.
- When the Console is shut down.
l Setting the Sleep mode

You can specify whether the Sleep mode is to be used and the period of time in which the
machine transits to the Sleep mode in the CONFIGURATION.
- Whether the Sleep mode is to be used
Set by the “Sleep mode Change” command in the CONFIGURATION.
- Time to transit to the Sleep mode
Set by the “Sleep Mode Change Time ([min])” command in the CONFIGURATION.
n Recovery from Sleep Mode
l Recover requirements
Press the stand-by switch.
l Processing upon recovery

Upon recovery from the Sleep mode, the RU performs a home-positioning operation of the
suction arm.
In addition, the initial self-diagnosis of the mechanical components takes place, as well as
home-positioning of the RU suction arm, under one of the following conditions.
- The mechanical components are located at other than the home positions.
- One of sensors detects an IP.
- A cassette is set in the RU.

MD-12
2.4 RU Bootup Processing 2.5 RU Termination Processing
The following self-diagnoses are carried out after the power is turned ON. Connection Termination processing of the mechanism and the log data storage take place.
verification between the RU and the Console is also carried out concurrently with the self-
u NOTE u
diagnoses.
If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be
n Initialization of the Mechanical Components saved.
The initialization of the mechanical components consists of the following five stages.
l Before IP search stage n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing

The suction arm is moved to the home position. (1) "Shutdown processing" command
Two instructions are available for a case where “system shutdown of the Console is
l IP search stage
carried out” and a case where “the stand-by switch of the RU is pressed”.
The motor is rotated by an appropriate amount to convey the IP to a position where it can
be confirmed by the sensor, on the assumption that the IP is located at a position where it (2) Execute "saving of log data", and turn OFF the power.
cannot be detected by the sensor within the machine. Saving of log data:
Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.
l After IP search stage
The suction arm is moved to the home position.
l Remaining IP ejection stage

When an IP is found within the machine during the IP search stage, its size is measured and
the IP is returned to the cassette. If a cassette is not set in the RU, the message prompting
to set an empty cassette appears.
l After remaining IP ejection

The cassette hold is released.
n Initialization of the Scanner Mechanism

The scanner mechanism is initialized.

MD-13
3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected
Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Component to be protected
mounted part
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function
+5 V F7 PNL37A
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage +5 V F13 SYN27A, SED27A
output detection function, which offers the following features: CPU37A board
+5 V F19 PNL37A
- Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault.
+5 V F20 PNL37A
- The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors
the power supply voltage output. +24 V F8 IP suction pump: PA1
- The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection +24 V F9 Driver IC: U14 (without a motor connected)
circuits (points) in which an error has occurred.
- The DC motors are protected by a driver circuit (mounted on the board) which incorporates +5 V F10 Sensor : SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4,
SND37A board
an overcurrent protection circuit. The driver circuit always detects a current and outputs a SA5 (SA5-1, SA5-2), SA6, SA7,
SA8, SA9, SA10, SA11, SA12,
current of up to 2 A. If it detects the current larger than 2 A, it stops outputting the current
SA16, SC1, SC3, SZ1, SZ2
by the protection circuit.
Erasure LED board: ERS37B
3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection +24 V F1 CPU37A, SND37A, ERS37B
PSU37B board
Circuit and the Components to Be Protected +24 V F2 CPU37A, SND37A, ERS37B, PNL37A
Protection circuit
Power supply Component to be protected
mounted part
SND37A board +24 V DC motor: MA2
REFERENCE
The pulse motors (MA1, MC1, MZ1 and MZ2) are protected by the PSU37B board fuse (F1).

MD-14
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram

MD-15
3.2 Erasure Unit Control n Erasure Operation
Two kinds of operations are used, one for erasure after the IP reading (routine erasure) and
the other for erasure when the erasure button on the RU operation panel is pressed (primary
n Erasure Unit Control erasure).
The erasure lamp (LED) control circuit is located on the SND board. A control signal from the The difference between the two modes is whether or not an image is to be output.
SND board turns ON/OFF the lamp (LED). The ERS board controls a detection of unlit lamps
- Routine erasure
(LED).
A dose exposed to the IP is measured, and the erasing method is changed depending
n Temperature Control of the Erasure Unit on the detected dose. The dose is measured when the image is read by the scanner unit
(light-collecting unit).
Since the temperature can be controlled by heat generation and self-cooling of the erasure
- In case of ST-VI type
unit, temperature control is not performed. Therefore, the erasure unit is not equipped with a - If the detected dose is lower than 400 mR, erasure operation takes place for the time
thermo sensor. corresponding to the detected dose.
- If the detected dose is 400 mR or higher, erasure operation takes place for the time
n Control Regarding Service Life of the Lamp (LED) equivalent to the one for 400 mR, and the message of high dose detection is issued.
The illumination time of the erasure lamp (LED) is counted, and a warning informing of the - In case of HR-VI type
replacement period is issued. - If the detected dose is lower than 8000 mR, erasure operation takes place for the time
You can set the timing for issuing the warning or whether or not the user is to be notified in corresponding to the detected dose.
the CONFIGURATION. - If the detected dose is 8000 mR or higher, erasure operation takes place for the time
equivalent to the one for 8000 mR, and the message of high dose detection is issued.
l Announcement of erasure lamp (LED) service life
When the illumination time of the erasure lamp (LED) approaches the assumed machine - Primary erasure
working hours (reaches 1272 hours), a warning that the replacement period is approaching is A dose exposed to the IP is measured similarly to routine erasure, and erasure operation
issued. takes place as same as routine erasure. However, no image is output.
l Erasure lamp (LED) service life 1 l Control in case of error

When the illumination time of the erasure lamp (LED) reaches the assumed machine working When an error occurs due to a burnt-out lamp (LED), the machine transits to the erasure
hours (reaches 1300 hours), a warning for prompting to replace the erasure lamp (LED) is degeneration mode.
issued. The relation of the conditions of the erasure unit lamps (LED), the mode to transit, and the
RU operation are as follows:
l Erasure lamp (LED) service life 2
When the illumination time of the erasure lamp (LED) exceeds the assumed machine working Erasure unit condition Mode to transit RU operation
hours (reaches 1314 hours), a warning that the erasure cannot be guaranteed is issued. Erasure operations take place twice by means
- A circuit failure of the ERS
The machine transits to the erasure degeneration mode after the warning is issued. of the largest erasure table (ST: 400 mR /HR:
board happens
8000 mR).
- When unlit erasure lamp Erasure
Since, however, the erasure performance
(LED) is detected degeneration
cannot be guaranteed, a message indicating
- A warning of “erasure lamp mode
that the erasure cannot be guaranteed is issued.
(LED) service life 2” is
The image can be read as usual in the erasure
issued
degeneration mode.

MD-16
3.3 LEDs on the SND37A Board and the CPU37A Board LED No.
(illumination Name Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
3.3.1 LEDs on the SND37A Board D6 (green) Cassette IN Lit when the cassette is loaded/
Unlit when the cassette is not loaded
SND37A board D9 (green) Cassette hold Lit when the cassette is held/Unlit otherwise
D18 (green) Suction arm HP Lit when the removal arm is at the home position/
Unlit when the removal arm is at another position
D7 D56
D21 (green) INV37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D30 (green) 15x30 cassette Lit when a cassette other than the 15x30 cassette is loaded/
identification Unlit the 15x30 cassette is loaded
D33 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D13 D16
D36 (green) INV37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D39 (green) Cassette ejection Lit when the cassette is loaded/
Unlit when the cassette is ejected
D10 D19 D61, D62 D54, D55
D49 (green) IP sensor 2 Lit when the IP being conveyed is present/

Unlit when no IP is present
D53 (green) Grip release HP sensor Lit when the grip mechanism is at the home position/
Unlit otherwise
D59 (green) DSP1 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
D60 (green) DSP1 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
D61 (green) DSP2 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
D62 (green) DSP2 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
D10 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D13 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D59, D60
D15, D18, D21
D6, D9, D12
D33, D36
D24, D27, D30
D39, D42
D45, D47
D52, D53
D49, D51
D16 (orange) IP leak Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped

D19 (orange) Suction switchover Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D56 (orange) IP suction pump Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
PRIT103004.ai

MD-17
3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU37A Board LED No.
(illumination Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
CPU37A board D7 (green) Lit when communicating with the PC/Unlit otherwise
D8 (green) Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
D10 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D11 (green) Always flashes 45 seconds after the machine power is turned ON
D7, D8 D12 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
CN10 D13 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D15 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D10∼D25
D16 (green) Polygon speed HR_MODE enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D17 (green) PMT artificial voltage ON enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D18 (green) PMT artificial light source forcible OFF enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D19 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D21 (green) For debugging use (Normally unlit)
D22 (green) For debugging use (Lit during scanning)/Unlit otherwise
D23 (green) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON)
D27 (red) Lit when the high-voltage switch is turned ON/
Unlit when the high-voltage switch is turned OFF
CN10
Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
(green and orange)
D27
PRIT103003.ai

MD-18
3.4 Checking the Voltage n PSU37B Board
u INSTRUCTION u
3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of Replace the board if the power supply voltage is out of the standard range at a measurement
point.
the PSU37B Board/PSU37A Power Supply
Measurement Voltage standard Adjustment
n Board Location and Measurement Points Voltage
point range value
+24 V TP5 22.8 to 25.2 V 25.0 V
+5 V TP2 4.75 to 5.25 V 5.0 V
+15 V TP3 14.25 to 15.75 V 15.0 V
+12 V TP1 11.4 to 12.6 V 12.0 V
-15 V TP4 -15.75 to -14.25 V -15.0 V
n PSU37A Power Supply

Power Supply
(PSU37A) u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Voltage adjustment is not necessary.
- Voltage output range: +21.6 to 26.4 V (±10%) between the 5 and 8 pins and between the 1
PSU37B board and 4 pins of the CN8.
TP5 TP1 TP2 TP4 TP3

PRTM010103004.ai

MD-19
4. Descriptions of n IP Conveyance
Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation m CPU board; Setting of reading conditions
Conditions are set according to a combination of the IP size, the IP type, the reading
mode that is preset with the Console (exposure menu), and the reading mode (FR/GR)
that is preset with CONFIGURATION.
4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence
m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics
REFERENCE m Laser (LD); ON
The I/O names (CPU board, polygon (POL), etc.) in the following sequence correspond to
the I/O names in illustration of the scanner controller unit, and are denoted in the form of: n IP Moved to the Subscanning Unit
m I/O name; description of operation for that I/O name m Leading-edge sensor (SED); IP leading-edge detection
[Example] m CPU board; Correction data initial setting Detects the laser light reflected from the IP.
This means that the CPU board performs initial setting of the correction data. m PMT board, CPU board; Start of image reading
{MD:4.3_Image Data Flow}
n Machine Power ON
m Grip release motor (MZ2); Gripping/releasing of driving shaft/driven shaft
m CPU board; Correction data initial setting m Trailing edge detection (SED); The trailing edge of the IP is detected
m CPU board; Scanner self-diagnostics (completion of reading is detected)
{MD:4.4_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
n Reading Termination Processing
n Cassette Loading
m Laser (LD); OFF
m Polygon (POL); Start m Polygon (POL); Stop
Since it takes time for the polygon to get stable, it is started at the same time as the
cassette is loaded. m High voltage power supply (HV); Idling
m CPU board; Erasing level detection, error determination, change-of-
S-value detection
n IP Moved to the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide

The IP moves to the post-reading conveyance guide, and the reading operation is
complete.

MD-20
4.2 Correction Data
Shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data, and speed correction data are located
in the FLASH ROM on the CPU board. The data is copied into the SDRAM when the power
of the machine is turned ON, and used in operation.

MD-21
4.3 Image Data Flow
The flow of image data is described below.
Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2), and so
forth in the image data flow illustration.
It should be noted that the image data is sent to the Console nearly concurrently with
reading.
(1) When the laser light from the scanning optics unit hits the IP, it becomes
luminescence data, which is read by the photomultiplier through the light-
collecting guide.
(2) The resulting data is sent, in the form of analog data, from the photomultiplier
board (PMT board) to the CPU board.
(3) Analog data is converted to digital data (AD conversion) on the CPU board.
(4) Digital data is output to the DSP via the FIFO, and subjected to image processing
and shading correction. Thereafter, it is temporarily stored in the SDRAM on the
CPU board.
(5) The image data stored in the SDRAM is sent to the Console via the network under
control of the main CPU located on the CPU board.

MD-22
4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem
(1) Error code
The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the control
signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to facilitate
identification of their causes.
(2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics

(A) Polygon start
(B) Laser ON
(C) Scanner self-diagnostics
Spurious current is made to flow, and reading takes place. Whether the reading
can correctly take place is also checked.
(D) Laser OFF
(E) Error check for self-diagnostics
(3) Polygon diagnostics

It is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a predetermined time
after the polygon is started.
(4) Error detection during reading

During reading, an error caused by a timeout is detected.
(5) Check after reading is completed

In order to check whether abnormal is found with reading operation, error check is
performed upon completion of reading.

MD-23
5. Descriptions of 5.2 Conveyance Operation

Mechanical Components and Their Operations This section describes the operations that the sensors and mechanisms perform during IP
feed.
5.1 IP Conveyance Flow 5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation
l Sensor status prevailing before cassette insertion
Function Description
Opens the cover of the cassette that is inserted into the
Feeds an IP from a
[1] cassette.
cassette set unit. Feeds an IP from a cassette and conveys it
after measuring IP size.
[2] Reads an image. Reads an image that is recorded on the IP.
[3] Conveys the IP. Transfers the IP, whose image has been read.
[4] Erases an image. Erases an image that is recorded on the IP.

Loads an IP into a Loads the IP, whose image has been erased, into the cassette,
[5] cassette. and ejects the cassette.

MD-24
l Cassette insertion and cassette size determination l Cassette entry detection, cassette hold, and cassette cover opening operation
When the cassette is inserted into its position, the shutter opens and the cassette ejection When the cassette is inserted to the cassette cover opening pin, the cassette cover opens
sensor (SA4) closes. and the cassette IN sensor (SA1) closes.
Also, the movable guide assembly and 15x30 cassette movable guide assembly lowers in When the SA1 closes, the cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turns OFF and the cassette
accordance with cassette size to open/close the small cassette size sensor (SA8) and the hold sensor (SA2) opens. Consequently, it is detected that the cassette is held.
“15x30 IP width” identifying sensor (SA9).
Only when the inserted cassette is HR cassette, the Inch/metric detection sensor (SA16) is in
CLOSE state.
Only when the inserted cassette is inch-sized small cassette, the HR cassette size sensor
(SA10) is in OPEN state.
The size of the inserted cassette is determined in accordance with the OPEN/CLOSE status
of the SA8, SA9, SA10 and SA16.
Cassette size SA8 SA9 SA10 SA16
15x30cm IP width cassette:
OPEN OPEN CLOSE OPEN
15x30(cm)
Small size ST cassette (metric-sized):
OPEN CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
24x30(cm), 18x24(cm)
Small size ST cassette (inch-sized):
OPEN CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
10x12(inch), 8x10(inch)
Small size HR cassette:
OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN
24x30(cm), 18x24(cm)
Large size ST cassette:
CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
14x17(inch), 14x14(inch), 35x43(cm), 35x35(cm)

MD-25
l Side-positioning guides operation l IP suction
Side-positioning guides lower in accordance with each cassette size, determined by SA8, At the same time the side-positioning guide(s) lower(s), the IP removal arm moves from its
SA9 and SA16. home position and the SA3 opens.
All of the side-positioning guides are lifted up (HP) when it meets the following conditions. At this time, the IP removal arm pushes up the cassette cover while moving to the suction
- Side-positioning guide for IP protrusion prevention (SA6) : OPEN position.
- Side-positioning sensor (SA7) : OPEN The IP is sucked by the IP suction pump (PA1) and the suction cup. The IP removal arm,
- Side-positioning detection sensor (SA11) : CLOSE when sucking the IP, moves it to the conveyance start position.
- Inch/metric side-positioning guide HP detection sensor (SA12) : OPEN
Every time the SA7 changes its status from OPEN to CLOSE, and then to OPEN again, each
side-positioning guide lower in the following order:
- Side-positioning guide for IP protrusion prevention
- Side-positioning guide for 15x30 cassette
- Side-positioning guide for large-size cassette and side-positioning guide on the reference side
The side-positioning guides return to their home position when the shaft of the side-positioning
guide assembly rotates 180 degrees in the status where all the guides are lowered.
Identifying the inserted cassette by the state of SA8, SA9 and SA16, the side-positioning
guide for small-size cassette works as follows.
- SA8 is OPEN : No operation from HP
- SA8 is CLOSE, SA9 is OPEN and SA16 is OPEN : No operation from HP
- SA8 is CLOSE, SA9 is OPEN and SA16 is CLOSE : Slide from HP to left.
- SA8 is CLOSE and SA9 is CLOSE : Slide from HP to left and lower.
<When the IP is to be vacuum-retained>
The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF. The PA1 operates so that the suction cup
vacuum-retains the IP.
<When IP suction relief is to be provided>

The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns ON. This provides IP suction relief.

MD-26
l IP side-positioning 5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation
When the IP removal arm moves IP to its conveyance position, the IP is side-positioned to
the reference position by being pressed against the side-positioning guide.
l From reading to erasure of images
Images on the IP are read by the laser light exposed from the scanning optics unit and by the
light-collecting guide when the IP passes above the center roller.
The IP which has been read is conveyed to the erasure unit. Images on the IP are erased
when the IP passes through the erasure unit.
l IP suction and restoration into the cassette

The IP removal arm moves to the IP suction position to suck the IP when the IP is restored
into the cassette. At this time, the SA3 opens because the IP removal arm moves from its
home position. When the IP removal arm moves to the suction position, the IP suction pump
turns ON and sucks the IP. After the suction, IP is restored into the cassette by the IP removal
arm.
l IP conveyance
The IP removal arm moves to the IP conveyance position while sucking the IP and leaks the
IP from the suction cup.
After the IP is released, the IP removal arm moves to its home position and SA3 closes.
On the way the IP is moved to the conveyance position, the length of the IP is measured
based on the time from when the IP length measurement sensor (SA5) closes until when the
SA5 opens again.
Also, when the IP sensor 1 (SC3) closes, the IP conveyance speed changes from the normal
conveyance speed to the reading conveyance speed.

MD-27
l Moving the IP removal arm to its hope position and releasing the cassette hold l Removing the cassette
After releasing the IP, the IP removal arm returns to the home position, and the SA3 closes. When the cassette is removed, the cassette cover is automatically closed by the cassette
When the SA3 closes, the SOLA1 turns ON and the cassette hold is released. The cassette cover closing roller.
hold arm lowers as the SOLA1 turns ON. Consequently, the SA2 closes. Cassette ejection sensor (SA4) opens when the shutter closes, and the removal of the
After the cassette hold is released, the cassette can be removed. cassette is detected.
Also, SA1, SA8, SA9 and SA10 return to the state before the cassette is inserted.

MD-28
5.3 Erasure Unit 5.4 Conveyor Unit
l Erasing Images l Gripping Operation

The IP is conveyed between the lamp assembly and the reflective plate, and the IP image The IP conveyed from the erasure unit is gripped and conveyed by the conveyor unit rollers.
erasure is performed when IP is loaded. The grip is released by the grip feature before the IP reading operation starts in the
subscanning unit.

MD-29
5.5 Subscanning Unit
5.5.1 IP Reading
When the IP passes over the center roller, laser light is radiated from the scanning optics
unit.
When the laser radiated from the scanning optics unit comes against the IP, the image
recorded on the IP emits light.
The generated light is directly gathered by the light-collecting guide or reflected by the
lightcollecting mirror and then gathered by the light-collecting guide.
The light collected on the light-collecting guide is fowarded to the photomultiplier (PMT board)
and processed as image data.
The configuration of the scanning optics unit, the light-collecting guide, and the rollers is as
follows.

MD-30
5.5.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading
The cam coordinating with the MZ2 drives the nip arm to grip the IP and release the IP for
the purpose of conveying and reading the IP.
If the IP shifts due to the vibration of the motor or oscillation of the machine during the IP
reading, abnormalities in images might result.

MD-31
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Troubleshooting (MT)

MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications

RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code

1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the Console screen to display
an error code upon error detection
Trouble occurred
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console
Console-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
Checking the Error Log
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:1.2.1_Checking the Error Log} Errors that result in image abnormalities due to a scratched IP, laser light blockage caused
by dust, or electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to
detect an error code
{MT:1.2_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Errors that occur due to a CPU board, interrupt the progress of a process, and cause the
inability to detect an error code
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU board due to an improper
FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code

and the inability of the machine to boot
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MT-1

MT-2
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-out
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about errors
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of error encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
codes. If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered during
troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information. Therefore, you may
START lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s use of the machine.
n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log

When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code displayed
on the Console represents the last-encountered error.
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the encountered
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
Back up the ERROR LOG and CONFIGURAION.
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
{MU:1.19_ERROR DB}
END

MT-3
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
(1) Group the errors that occurred.
occurrence timing.
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that
occurred first). l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the Console
Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
(Example)
indications.
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence groups,
because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 minutes. Error Occurrence
- The first error in Group A is "12302". code date
n When an Error Occurred after "Time Data" Was Acquired from the Console 12256 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
12255 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00258D tiphscan____
Error codes displayed on the Console screen 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Perform troubleshooting with this error
Error code that occurred last code. FRRB201003.ai
Error code that l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the Console
A
occurred second The resulting "occurrence date/time" indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Code of the error Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position
that occurred first. (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
B Perform The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
troubleshooting
with this error Error Occurrence Occurrence
code. code date time
FRRB201001.ai
10300 0000.00.00 00:00:19 00257D tiphscan____
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817 Error code that occurred second
n When an Error Occurred before "Time Data" Was Acquired from the 10302 0000.00.00 00:00:10 00258D tiphscan____
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Console Perform troubleshooting with this error
code.
Error codes displayed on the Console screen
FRRB201004.ai
n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred First

Error code that occurred last
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the
Error code that
A error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be
occurred second
accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered
Code of the error
trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting.
that occurred first.
Perform
B
troubleshooting
with this error
code.
FRRB201002.ai

MT-4
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table
When the error causing the failure is identified, see the “Probable Cause and Remedy” in the
error code table, and proceed with the operation.
n Error Code Table Description

The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence
conditions.

MT-5
n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1XYZZ 1:
2:
Image processing CPU
Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
00 to 99: Reference number for each error category
4: Overall control
0 to 9: Error category
5: Network control
0 to 4: Error level
6: Scanner control (for back side)
1: 1 for all RU errors
FRRB201005.ai
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
l X: Error level 9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
Error level notations
FATAL error: 0
l ZZ: Reference number
- The user is notified of an error occurrence. It is managed according to each error category.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette or IP,
etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary
to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time with
another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.

MT-6
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made with
the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON.
The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned ON
while the high-voltage switch is ON.
(1) Remove the cover.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover
(2) Remove the duct (right).

{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)}
(3) Remove the board box cover.

{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover}
(4) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) of the CPU board.

MT-7
2. Error Code Table

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10001 File open error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.
[During bootup]
10002 File read error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
[During bootup]
10003 File format error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU
- Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
board into the DRAM,
10004 File write error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM.
- Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
- Replace the CPU board.
Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the
DRAM.
[During bootup]
10005 File close error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.

MT-8
Error
Code
- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU37A power supply,
the PSU37B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10210 SED board power supply error An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Replace the SED board.
edge detection (SED) board was detected. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup]
HV high voltage power supply - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
error of range. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10222 PMT 15V voltage error An error is detected for the PMT analog power supply signal - Replace the PMT board.
(+15VOKH, 15VOKL). - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
- Check the fuses of the CPU board. Replace the PSU37A power
supply, the PSU37B board and the CPU board if the fuse blowout
recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
of range when HV is on. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.

MT-9
Error
Code
[During bootup] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10243 Polygon lock timeout (2nd) The polygon OK signal cannot be detected (twice) within the - Replace the scanning optics unit.
specified time after turning on the polygon. - Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10250 Leading edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the leading edge did not occur - Replace the SED board.
within the specified time. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Check the error log for other errors. If any error occurs, analyze it.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10252 Image read error The image reading error occurred. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup or routine processing]

10253 FIFO overflow The image buffer FIFO was overflowed.

MT-10
Error
Code
[During routine processing]
10287 Light-shielding check It was detected that the QL value was 80 or more when - Check the installation of the plate.
detecting S-value shift.
[During bootup]
The cassette width sensors detected an abnormal - Check for abnormalities in installing the cassette hold mechanism.
combination when the cassette set unit performed a cassette - Check the detecting area of the sensor (SA2) for smears.
Cassette hold sensor hold operation. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no - Reseat the sensor (SA2) connector.
10311
combination inconsistency cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
detected to release a cassette hold (CLOSED). The cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
ejection sensor (SA4) detected that no cassette was present - Replace the sensors.
(OPEN).
[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators (SA1 and SA11).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette sensor combination
10312 an abnormal combination. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
inconsistency (1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA4) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). - Replace the sensors.
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected

an abnormal combination.The cassette IN sensor (SA1)
detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette
Cassette sensor combination
10317 ejection sensor (SA4) detected that no cassette was present
inconsistency (4) (OPEN).
Inch/metric switch frame HP sensor (SA12) detected Home
Position (CLOSE).
[During bootup]
Cassette sensor combination an abnormal combination. Side-positioning detection sensor
10318
inconsistency (5) (SA11) detected metric position (CLOSE).
Inch/metric switch frame HP sensor (SA12) detected Home
Position (CLOSE).

MT-11
Error
Code
[During bootup]
Cassette sensor combination an abnormal combination. The cassette ejection sensor (SA4)
10319
inconsistency (6) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).
HR cassette detection sensor (SA10) detected a ST cassette
(OPEN).
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]

- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[When the mechanism normally works]

- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism
- Check if the motor is working.
was performed, it was unable to detect that the IP protrusion
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
10322 Side-positioning driving error prevention frame HP sensor (SA6) was CLOSED. Although
- Check the SND board fuses.
retries were performed, the sensor status was not detected,
- Replace the sensors or the motors.
and the system went down. Or, the error was detected when
driving/stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)


- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism was
performed, it was unable to detect that the side-positioning
10323 Side-positioning overrun sensor (SA7) was OPENED. Or it detected that both the IP
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
protrusion prevention frame HP sensor (SA6) and the side-
positioning sensor (SA7) were CLOSED.

MT-12
Error
Code

When a suction arm home positioning operation was
performed, the suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven.
Suction arm home positioning However, it was impossible to detect that the suction arm HP
10336 - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error sensor (SA3) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries
were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the
system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/
stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 or 12491 concurrently occurs]
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
cassette IN sensor and cassette ejection sensor in the - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette size sensor
10340 cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The - Reseat the SND board connectors.
combination error (2) cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that no cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
was present (OPEN). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Replace the sensors.
detected a cassette (CLOSED).
[When a conveyance error occurs]

- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During bootup] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven. However, the [When no conveyance error occurs]
Remaining IP conveyance error
10349 IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the housing unit or the IP length sensor - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
(sub scanning) (SA5) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time (did - Reseat the sensor connectors.
not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed - Reseat the SND board connectors.
in the subscanning unit. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.

MT-13
Error
Code
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP length measurement process was
Remaining IP length performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were
10353 measurement conveyance error driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did
(1) not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined
period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving one of
the motors.
[During bootup]
10354 measurement conveyance error driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit
(2) did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within
a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected
when stopping one of the motors.
[During bootup]
10355 measurement conveyance error driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit
(3) did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within
a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected
when driving/stopping one of the motors.
[During bootup]
10356 Nonstandard IP detection When a remaining IP length measurement process was
performed, a nonstandard IP size was detected.
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed,
Remaining IP side-positioning the IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven. However,
10358
error (1) IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the
error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.

MT-14
Error
Code
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
10359 Remaining IP search error transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven. However, one
of the motor had an error.
[During bootup]
Feed IP drop detection during When an IP feed operation was performed within the cassette
10360
bootup (2) for a remaining IP ejection process, the IP length sensor (SA5)
detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped.
[During bootup]
Remaining IP load conveyance When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP
10364
error during bootup (1) transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven. However, the
error was detected when driving one of the motors.
[During bootup]
Remaining IP load conveyance When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP
10365
error during bootup (2) transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven. However, the
error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors.

When a home positioning operation was performed for the
turn grip roller mechanism, the turn grip roller mechanism
driving motor (MC2) was driven. However, it was impossible
Turn grip roller mechanism
10367 to detect that the turn grip roller mechanism HP sensor (SC1)
home positioning error was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed,
the sensor status was not detected, and the system went
down. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the
motor.

The side-positioning inch/metric switch motor (MA5) was
driven during a home positioning of the inch/metric switch
Inch/metric switch frame home
10370 frame. However, OPEN or CLOSE status of the inch/metric
positioning error side-positioning frame HP detection sensor (SA12) was not
detected. Retries (twice) were performed but they were still
undetected, resulting in system shutdown.

MT-15
Error
Code
10373 Cassette hold release error An error was detected when releasing the cassette hold.

10379 Cassette hold error An error was detected when holding cassette.
- Reseat connectors of the motor, valve, and pump.

[During routine processing] - Reseat the SND board connectors.
Driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA1), turning on/off - Check for air leakage from the air hose during the IP suction operation.
10389 Feed IP suction error of the IP leak valve (SVA1) and turning on of the IP suction
pump (PA1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. - Update the version to the newest version.
Error was detected in either operation. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

Turning off of the leak valve (SVA1), driving of the suction arm - Update the version to the newest version.
10390 Feed IP error driving motor (MA3), and driving of the IP transport motors - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MC1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. Error update. (For design analysis)
was detected in either operation.

Turning on of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the - Update the version to the newest version.
10392 Feed IP leak error suction switching valve (SVA2) and turning off of the IP suction - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
pump (PA1) were performed in the feed-leak operation. An update. (For design analysis)
error was detected in either operation.

The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in
10396 Feed IP conveyance error feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an
error.

Feed IP conveyance retry - Update the version to the newest version.
10397 The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were stopped in feed- - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
stopped error conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an error. update. (For design analysis)

MT-16
Error
Code
[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.
10414 Subscanning conveyance error The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
reading conveyance, and one of the motors had an error. update. (For design analysis)
[During routing processing]

Post-reading conveyance error The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to
10419
(1) perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However,
the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.

- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
[When no conveyance error occurs]

- Check the detecting areas of the sensors (SA5) for smears.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor (SA5) connectors.
The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10420 Erasure conveyance error perform an IP erasure conveyance operation. However, the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. - Check the SND board fuses.


IP suction error Turning on of the leak valve (SVA1) and driving of the suction
10421
(after IP reading) arm driving motor (MA1) were performed in the IP-loading
operation. Error was detected in either operation.
- Check for abnormalities or debris with the sensors.

After the cassette IP suction was released, the IP length
10422 Load IP drop (1) sensor (SA5) detected an IP (CLOSED). Therefore, retries
were performed. However, the maximum retry count was
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. update. (For design analysis)

MT-17
Error
Code
The IP length sensor (SA5) detected an IP (CLOSED).
10423 Load IP drop (2) Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum
retry count was exceeded.

When a suction positioning preliminary conveyance operation
was performed for a load IP, the IP transport motor (MC1)
IP suction positioning
10425 was driven. However, the IP length sensor (SA5) in the
preliminary conveyance error housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a
predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected
when driving/stopping the motor.

In the load IP leak operation, the following was performed:
driving of the IP transport motor (MC1), driving of suction arm
10432 IP suction relief error driving motor (MA1), turning off of the IP leak valve (SVA1),
and turning off of the IP suction pump (PA1). Error was
detected in one of the operations.


The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven.
However, IP length sensor (SA5) in the housing unit did
10435 IP conveyance error not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a
predetermined period of time. It is conceivable that the IP may
be jammed between the erasure unit and conveyor unit. Or,
the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.

MT-18
Error
Code

[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven in the operation - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller of positioning the subscanning grip roller to the reference - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10444
positioning error side before IP search, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) - Check the SND board fuses.
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
detected when driving/stopping the motor.


The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate
Subscanning grip roller free - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10445 the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor
rotation error (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error
was detected when driving/stopping the motor.


MT-19
Error
Code

[During routine processing] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller home- the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10446
positioning error the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the - Check the SND board fuses.
specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ - Replace the sensors or the motors.
stopping the motor.


In the operation of rejecting grip, the subscanning grip motor
10447 Rejection grip roller error (MZ2) was driven, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2)
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was
detected when driving/stopping the motor.

MT-20
Error
Code

Side-positioning HP sensor After the HP return of the side-positioning/IP jump prevention
10457 - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error mechanism was performed, it was detected that the IP
protrusion prevention frame HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN.


[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10458 Cassette size sensor error Due to a logical error in the cassette width sensor (SA8 and - Reseat the SND board connectors.
SA9), a cassette size cannot be identified. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
- Replace the sensors.

Inch/metric switch frame Sensor logic error occurred on the inch/metric frame position
10459
sensor error detection sensor (SA11, SA12) during inch/metric side-
positioning.

MT-21
Error
Code

The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven to
Post-reading conveyance error perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP
10462 - Check the SND board fuses.
(2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, error
was detected when driving one of the motors.

In the operation of rejecting grip, the turn grip motor (MC2)
10464 Turn grip roller error was driven, but the turn grip sensor (SC1) did not close within
the specified time period.

When the side-positioning inch/metric switch motor (MA5) was
driven, the side-positioning detection sensor (SA11) did not
10466 Inch/metric switch error (1) CLOSE. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry
count was exceeded. Or, error was detected when driving/
stopping the motor.

When the side-positioning inch/metric switch motor (MA5)
was driven, the inch/metric side-positioning frame HP
10467 Inch/metric switch error (2) detection sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE. Although retries
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or,
error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.

MT-22
Error
Code
was driven, the side-positioning detection sensor (SA11) and
10468 Inch/metric switch error (3) the inch/metric side-positioning frame HP detection sensor
(SA12) did not OPEN. Although retries were performed, the
maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, error was detected
when driving/stopping the motor.

10472 Roller grip 2 release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

10473 Roller 2 grip error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for engaging the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

10474 Roller 1 grip release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing error the grip of roller 1. update. (For design analysis)
External erasure data [During bootup] - Update the version to the newest version.
10710
acquisition error It failed to read the erasure data file. - Replace the CPU board.
[During bootup] - Reseat the INV board connectors.

It was found that the INV board was not mounted in the - Reseat the SND board connectors (CN5 and CN6).
10731 INV board position error correct position. For the correct board position, refer to the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
MD volume. - Replace the INV board.
[During bootup]
Configuration initialization
10900 The Iconfiguration data (Irset.cfg) could not be loaded into the - Again set the configuration information in EDIT CONFIGURATION.
failure SDRAM from the flash ROM on the CPU board.

MT-23
Error
Code
- Check that the CPU board DIP switch (S7) is set as follows:
Dip-SW No.2: OFF
[During bootup]
Dip-SW No.3: ON
10904 RU type error The RU type acquired by DIPSW of CPU board was not CR-
Dip-SW No.4: OFF
IR392.
[During bootup]
Image signal monitor value immediately after replacement of the fuses.
11200 When diagnosing the simulated data transfer, the A/D - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
(simulated current) error conversion data for simulated image were out of range. - Replace the PMT board.
[During bootup] - Replace the scanning optics unit.

LD drive current value error - Check that there is no excessive rise in the ambient temperature.
11230 The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times
(during bootup) the factory default value.
The laser drive current value (LDIF) is affected by the ambient
temperature.

The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity - Carry out sensitivity correction.
11270 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and
(±50 to ±70%) (WND&LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
- Replace the light-collecting guide.
±70%.

Shifted sensitivity The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK - Carry out sensitivity correction.
11271
(70% or more) (WND&LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it - Replace the light-collecting guide.
was detected if the value was ±70% or more.
[During bootup]
- Turn ON the HV switch of the CPU board. Check that the red LED
11280 Initialization HV-OFF status It was found that the high voltage of the photomultiplier (PMT on the upper right of the switch is lit.
board) was OFF.

MT-24
Error
Code
[When the cassette is set in the RU]
- Remove the cassette.
[During bootup]
Bootup improper cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11315 It was found that a cassette was improperly loaded (inserted
loading detection obliquely or into a nonreference position).
- Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1, SA4, SA8 and SA9)
normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
[When the cassette is set in the RU]

- Remove the cassette.
[During bootup]
It was found that a cassette was incompletely inserted. The
Bootup incomplete cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11316 cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
insertion detection present (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
that a cassette was present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that a cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11341 present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (1) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
was released (CLOSED).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11342 present (OPEN). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (2) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
(OPEN).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).

MT-25
Error
Code
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette
hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Although retries - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
11373 Cassette hold retry error were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. An - Check the SND board fuses.
error results also when the following operation takes place. - Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
- When the cassette is loaded upside down;
- When the cassette is loaded front side back.

11375 Cassette not detected hold). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no
- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
cassette was present (OPEN).

The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
11379 Cassette hold release error release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Although retries were - Replace the sensors.
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.

It was found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was OPEN (did
11390 Feed IP suction error not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak
- Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
sequence. Although an IP feed operation was retried, the
- Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.

perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1
11396 Feed IP conveyance error (1) (SC3) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP)
within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.

MT-26
Error
Code
perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor
11397 Feed IP conveyance error (2) 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect
an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the SND board fuses.

In the feed-conveyance operation, the IP length sensor
11398 Nonstandard IP size (SA5) in the housing unit and the IP sensor 1 (SC3) were in
the unlikely combination, It was therefore concluded that a
nonstandard IP size was encountered.


[During routine processing] - Check the SND board fuses.
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to - Replace the sensor (SC3) or the motors.
11413 Leading-edge detection error perform a reading conveyance operation. However, the - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU37A power supply,
leading-edge detection interrupt did not occur within a the PSU37B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
predetermined period of time. immediately after replacement of the fuses.
- Reseat the SED board connectors.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.

MT-27
Error
Code
[During routine processing] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to
Subscanning conveyance error
11414 perform a reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor [When no conveyance error occurs]
(1) 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.

The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to
Subscanning conveyance error perform a reading conveyance operation. As a result, a
11415 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(2) leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP
sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN within a monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
predetermined period of time. - Check the SND board fuses.

The IP transport motors (MZ1/MC1) were driven for a reading
Subscanning conveyance error conveyance operation, and a leading-edge detection interrupt
11416 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(3) occurred. The IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit became
OPEN, but a tailing-edge detection interrupt did not occur monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
within the specified time. - Check the SND board fuses.
[During bootup]
Empty cassette ejection When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an - Remove the cassette.
11454
request empty cassette was detected. It was therefore requested that - Make sure that no IP remains inside the machine.
the cassette be ejected.

MT-28
Error
Code
Insufficient erasure due to over The over X-ray dose was detected in the erasure mode
- Again erase the IP.
11480 - Confirm the S value, and carry out sensitivity correction when
X-ray dose processing, so the message was displayed and the needed.
insufficiently erased IP was returned to the cassette.
[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11495 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.
[During bootup]
Request for an empty cassette When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the
11498 -
having a specified size insertion of an empty cassette having a specified size was
requested.
[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11499 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.
11510 Unread IP ejection The IP was ejected into the cassette without being read. -
<User operation>
This error occurs if no menu is selected at the time of image
Patient information not output.
11511 -
registered <Occurrence condition analysis>
The patient information relevant to the processed IP was not
registered in the CL.
11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL. -
[During routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
An attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data connection between the CL and RU.
11531 Retransmission retry failure from the RU to the CL after communication with the CL is - Check that the IP address of the “master CL” set in the RU is correct.
suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
is lost and the cassette is ejected.

MT-29
Error
Code
Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate. Therefore, the
Erasure time extension due message appeared, and a process was performed in the
- Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11700 to erasure lamp illumination erasure extension mode in which the erasure time was recurs.
failure extended. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.
A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate.

Inadequate erasure due to The erasure degeneration mode then prevailed due to
inadequate erasure. An unerased IP was ejected into the - Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11701 erasure lamp illumination cassette. The message appeared and the user made a mode recurs.
failure selection. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.
A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time

Erasure lamp life end advance
11702 was exceeded. Therefore, the message appeared to indicate - Replace the lamp assembly.
notice that the lamp life end is about to be reached.
The life end warning message appeared because a

11703 Erasure lamp life end 1 predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was - Replace the lamp assembly.
exceeded.
The life end message appeared because a predetermined

11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace the lamp assembly.
Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an INV board

Erasure time extension due to - Replace the INV board. Replace the lamp assembly if the failure
11732 failure. Therefore, the erasure time was extended. For the recurs.
INV board failure number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate

due to an INV board failure. The erasure degeneration mode
Erasure degeneration due to - Replace the INV board. Replace the lamp assembly if the failure
11733 then prevailed, and an unerased IP was ejected into the recurs.
INV board failure cassette. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.
An IP that was inadequately erased due, for instance, to an

- Replace the lamp assembly. Replace the INV board if the failure
11760 Inadequately erased IP ejection erasure lamp illumination failure was returned to the cassette, recurs.
and the cassette was ejected.

MT-30
Error
Code
Erasure lamp cleaning preliminary message was displayed
Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11780 since the number of days since the last cleaning date or the - Clean the erasure filter.
preliminary message number of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.
Erasure lamp cleaning warning message was displayed since

Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11781 the number of days since the last cleaning date or the number - Clean the erasure filter.
warning of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.
The message appeared and the error was logged because

Erasure lamp filter life end the life end of the erasure lamp filter was reached, that is,
11904 - Replace the erasure filter.
indication an IP conveyance count of 12,000 (2 years) was exceeded.
Replace the lamp filter.
The message appeared and the error was logged because

the life end of the IP suction pump was reached, that is, an
11905 IP suction pump life end IP conveyance count of 135,000 (3 years) was exceeded.
- Replace the IP suction pump.
Replace the pump.
The message appeared because a predetermined cumulative

11906 Laser life end laser illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace the scanning optics unit.
[During shutdown processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
Log information save error connection between the CL and RU.
11907 An error occurred when an attempt was made to save error
during shutdown process log/trace information in the FTP server.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
Cassette insertion before The message appeared and the cassette was ejected
11950 console connection because the cassette was inserted before the connection to -
establishment the console was established.

MT-31
Error
Code
The message appeared because the cassette was not
inserted all the way in and two seconds elapsed.
An error results also when the following operation takes place.
- When the cassette is slantly loaded;
11951 Cassette setting failure - When the cassette is inserted into an opposite side to
-
reference;
- When a cassette of an inch type is loaded into a metric-type
machine.
- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
[During MUTL operation]
12001 File open error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file open sequence.
connection between the CL and RU.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.
and the hub.
12004 File write error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file write sequence.

SED board power supply error
12210 An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Take action when the error code 10210 occurs.
(during routine processing) edge detection (SED) board was detected.

HV high voltage power supply
12220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10220 occurs.
error of range.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.

An error about the HV detection value signal of PMT board - Replace the PMT board.
Difference value error of HV
12221 was detected. The difference between the minimum and - Replace the PSU37A power supply.
high voltage power supply maximum monitor values is out of range when compared to - Replace the PSU37B board.
the setting value. - Replace the CPU board.

MT-32
Error
Code
12223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10223 occurs.
of range when HV is on.
- Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.

[During routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
12231 LD monitor value error warning The difference between minimum and maximum of the laser - Replace the PSU37A power supply.
drive current monitor value is out of specification. - Replace the PSU37B board.

- Replace the scanning optics unit.
12233 LD light intensity error The laser light intensity is less than 50%.
- Replace the PSU37A power supply.
- Replace the PSU37B board.

12240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count.
- Take action when the error code 10240 occurs.

[During bootup or routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
SYN interval count difference
12241 The difference between the minimum and maximum SYN - Replace the PSU37A power supply.
value error interval counts during reading was out of the specified range. - Replace the PSU37B board.

The interrupt status occurred as there was an error of interval
12242 Polygon improper index for the index signal, which is generated for every rotation of
- Same as the error code 10243.
polygon.

12243 Polygon lock timeout (1st) After polygon "ON", the polygon "OK" signal cannot detect - Same as the error code 10243.
within predetermined period of time (1st time).

12244 Polygon lock error An error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is - Same as the error code 10243.
detected.

MT-33
Error
Code
Polygon surface counter [During bootup or routine processing]
12245 - Same as the error code 10243.
timeout The interrupt was not notified within 150 ms of LD ON.

12251 Trailing edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the tailing edge did not occur within -
the specified time.

The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity (±50 to
12270 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
±70%) (LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
±70%.

Shifted sensitivity (70% or The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
12271 - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
more) (LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it
was detected in case the value was ±70% or more.

12286 Scanner retry The operation of the polygon or HV ON was retried.
-


When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism
12322 Side-positioning driving retry was performed, the IP protrusion prevention frame HP sensor
(SA6) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time.
Therefore, a retry was performed.

MT-34
Error
Code

[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
When the side-positioning/IP jump prevention mechanism was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
12323 Side-positioning overrun retry performed, the side-positioning sensor (SA7) did not OPEN - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Check the SND board fuses.
performed. - Replace the sensors or the motors.


The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12336
retry (1) However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not CLOSE - Reseat the sensor connectors.
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.

The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12337
retry (2) the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not CLOSE within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.

MT-35
Error
Code
The suction arm driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12338
retry the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) did not OPEN within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.

The turn grip roller mechanism driving motor (MC2) was
driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation
Turn grip roller mechanism
12367 for the turn grip roller mechanism. However, the turn grip
home positioning retry (1) roller mechanism HP sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
performed.

The turn grip roller mechanism driving motor (MC2) was driven
Turn grip roller mechanism to perform a home positioning operation for the turn grip roller
12368
home positioning retry (2) mechanism. However, the turn grip roller mechanism HP
sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of
time. Therefore, a retry was performed.

The turn grip roller mechanism driving motor (MC2) was driven
Turn grip roller mechanism to perform a home positioning operation for the turn grip roller
12369
home positioning retry mechanism. However, the turn grip roller mechanism HP
sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of
time. Therefore, a retry was performed.

MT-36
Error
Code
[During bootup and routine processing]
Inch/metric switch driving motor (MA5) was driven by one
Inch/metric switch frame home pulse to perform a home positioning of the inch/metric switch
12370
positioning retry (1) frame. However, because the turn grip roller mechanism
HP detection sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE within a
predetermined period of time, a retry was performed.

Inch/metric switch frame driving motor (MA5) was driven to
Inch/metric switch frame home perform a home positioning of the inch/metric switch frame.
12371
positioning retry (2) However, because the turn grip roller mechanism home
positioning detection sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE within a

Inch/metric switch frame driving motor (MA5) was driven to
Inch/metric switch frame home perform a home positioning of the inch/metric switch frame.
12372
positioning retry (3) However, because the turn roller grip mechanism home
positioning detection sensor (SA12) did not OPEN within a

- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
12373 Cassette hold retry hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Therefore, a retry
- Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
was performed.

Cassette undetected in cassette The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
12376
hold sequence hold). However, the cassette ejection sensor (SA4) detected - Replace the sensors.
that no cassette was present (OPEN).

The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
12379 Cassette hold release retry release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Therefore, a retry - Replace the sensors.
was performed.

MT-37
Error
Code
When a suction arm home position was checked, it was found
12383 Suction arm home positioning that the suction arm HP sensor (SA3) was OPEN. Therefore,
-
the suction arm was returned to its home position.

It was found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was OPEN (did [When the mechanism normally works]
12390 Feed IP suction retry not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak - Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
sequence. Therefore, an IP feed operation was retried. - Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
- Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.

perform a feed conveyance operation. However, the IP
12396 Feed IP conveyance retry (1) sensor 1 (SC3) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
performed.

The IP transport motors (MC1 and MZ1) were driven
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP
12397 Feed IP conveyance retry (2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE within
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

perform a postreading conveyance operation. However, IP
12419 Post-reading conveyance retry sensor 1 (SC3) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Therefore,
a retry was performed.

MT-38
Error
Code
- Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and light-
emitting regions).
[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
After an IP suction release operation was performed, it was
12422 Load IP drop retry (1) found that the IP length sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (due to IP
detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
[During bootup]
IP found in remaining IP
12442 When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an IP
ejection cassette during bootup was found in the cassette.
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, a
No remaining-IP ejection empty
12452 remaining IP was detected in the machine. However, it was
cassette during bootup found that there was no ejection cassette in the cassette set
unit.

In the operation of rejecting grip, the turngrip motor (MC2)
12465 Turn grip roller error was driven, but the turn grip sensor (SC1) did not open within
the specified time period.

When the side-positioning inch/metric switch motor (MA5) was
12466 Inch/metric switch error (1) driven, the inch/metric side-positioning HP detection sensor
(SA12) did not CLOSE . Thus, a retry was performed.

When the side-positioning switch motor (MA5) was driven, the
12467 Inch/metric switch error (2) inch/metric side-positioning HP detection sensor (SA12) did
not CLOSE. Thus, a retry was performed.

12468 Inch/metric switch error (3) was driven, the side-positioning detection sensor (SA11) and
the inch/metric side-positioning frame HP detection sensor
(SA12) did not OPEN. Thus, a retry was performed.

MT-39
Error
Code
Inch/metric switch position
12469 Inch/metric side-positioning HP detection sensor (SA12) was
error not CLOSE. Thus, a home positioning was performed.

- Not problem. No countermeasure is necessary.
12485 Pulse motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the pulse motor. [When the error does not concurrently occur with the error 13485]

12486 DC motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the DC motor. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12487 Sensor error Error occurred when acquiring the sensor status. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12488 Fuse error Error occurred when acquiring the fuse condition. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12489 Solenoid error Error occurred when turning on/off the solenoid. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12490 Pump error Error occurred when turning on/off the pump. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12491 Valve error Error occurred when turning on/off the valve. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12510 Message format error An illegal command was received from the CL.
-

MT-40
Error
Code
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12520 Message transmission failure An attempt to transmit a message from the RU to the CL connection between the CL and RU.
failed. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
and the hub.
A REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however,
12521 RES message receiving timeout RU cannot receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in
a time-out. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12522 ACK receiving time-out A message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot connection between the CL and RU.
receive ACK, thus resulting in a time-out. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make

Although the SET command was transmitted from the RU, a
SET command CL receiving signal other than OK was received as a response from the
12523 -
error CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, the cassette
is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU
panel.

Unlit erasure lamp detection - Update the version to the newest version.
12750 An error was detected when acquiring the status of lamp - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
error being unlit. update. (For design analysis)

12753 Erasure lamp turning off error An error was detected when turning off the erasure lamps.

MT-41
Error
Code
12754 Erasure lamp lighting error An error was detected when turning on the erasure lamps.

It was detected that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 1
12770 INV board port 1 failure was blown. For the INV board location and port numbers,
- Replace the INV board.
refer to the MD volume.

12803 Blown fuse F4 of SND board It was detected that the fuse F4 of SND board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

12817 Blown fuse F7 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F7 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.
and the hub.
The FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from
12990 FTP server access error the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a
connection cannot be established. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.

MT-42
Error
Code
13230 Laser drive current value error The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times - Take action when the error code 10230 or 11906 occurs.
the factory default value.

Updating the drive current
13232 The drive current maximum value was more than the total of -
maximum value initial current value maximum value + specified value.

- Carry out shading correction by means of a 14 x 17 inch (35 x 43 cm)
13281 Reading IP size error The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for or 14 x 14 inch (35 x 35 cm) IP.
shading correction, so that error is detected.

SHD/POLYGON correction data It failed to create the correction data as the difference between
13282 - Carry out shading correction by means of a scratch-free IP.
error the minimum and maximum QL values of the shading data
exceeded the specified value.
[During MUTL operation] - Carry out sensitivity correction by means of IPs exposed to doses of
13283 HVCNT value error An out-of-spec HV is inputted. 1 mR to 10 mR.

13284 Format adjustment data error When format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is -
inputted.

13285 File restore error An error occurred when restoring the SCN data.
- Check that file extension is “.dat”.

13288 SHD data write error It failed to write the SHD data into the Flash ROM.
- Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.

Correction recording
13289 It failed to create the shading correction data. Shading - Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.
calculation cancel correction should be performed again.

MT-43
Error
Code
[During bootup] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
Bootup cassette sensor The cassette IN sensor (SA1), cassette hold sensor (SA2), - Reseat the sensor connectors.
13312
combination inconsistency cassette OUT sensor (SA4) and cassette size sensor (SA8 - Reseat the SND board connectors.
and SA9) detected an abnormal combination. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
Stop command for the stopped Although the motor was already stopped, a command for
13485 -
motor stopping was sent.
and the hub.
Detection of communication - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13520 It is detected that the communication between the CL and the connection between the CL and RU.
abortion to CL RU is broken. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
[During bootup or routine processing] and the hub.
The connection is suspended and initialization of
CL communication failure - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13521 communication between the CL and RU is performed again, connection between the CL and RU.
detected because the communication between the CL and RU is - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
broken.
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the
RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
13530 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs
due to hardware failure of the network, thereby causing connection between the CL and RU.
frequent retries.
and the hub.
[During bootup]
FTP server data acquisition - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13900 The data cannot be gotten from FTP server and it is set to an connection between the CL and RU.
failure initial value. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make

MT-44
3. Detail Code
The error log contains detail code associated with the error that occurred.
If the category of an error is either "3: Conveyance control" or "4: Overall control", a detail
code is displayed.
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code
SC3
SA1∼9
[11495] 2011/12/16 10:32:39.83 @ 101100001:0::a - - - - - - - - c/00000000/1/-

[12422] 2011/12/09 09:06:31.55 @ 101110001:0::a40000008c/00000000/1/2
Error code Occurrence Sensor status Barcode Reserved

date (Fixed) Shelf
(Fixed)
IP size
PRT030203001.ai
l Sensor status
0: OPEN
1: CLOSE
l IP size
0. 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm)
1. 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm)
2. 10" x 12"
3. 8" x 10"
4. 18 cm x 24 cm
5. 24 cm x 30 cm
8. 15 cm x 30 cm
l Barcode
- - - - - - - : Before detecting the IP size
40000008 : After detecting the IP size

MT-45
4. Abnormal Images No.2

Image nonuniformity
(entire 5 mm-pitch nonuniformity)
[Possible cause]
A scratch or crack is present on the gear of
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP the subscanning motor (MZ1).
4.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images
n Image Nonuniformity (Horizontal Streaks in the Subscanning Direction)

Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]
No.1
(25 mm-pitch nonuniformity) A scratch or crack is present on the spur gear
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP of the subscanning center roller.
[Countermeasure]
Replace the subscanning motor (MZ1).
“MC 9.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1)”
[Countermeasure]
Replace the spur gear of the subscanning * Nonuniformity is observed at 5 mm intervals in
center roller. the subscanning direction. The nonuniformity
“MC 9.7 Center Roller” cannot be visually recognized.
(A microscope is needed to check.)
FRRB203002.ai
* Nonuniformity is observed at 25 mm intervals

in the subscanning direction.
The nonuniformity can be visually recognized.
FRRB203001.ai

MT-46
No.3 Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]

The cleaning brush is accidentally operated
<Example 1> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP when reading the image (areas A to E in the
left figure).
A
<Example 2> 14x14 inch (35x35 cm) IP

B
<Example 3> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP

[Countermeasure]
D The cleaning brush should not be operated
while reading the image.
<Example 4> 18x24 cm IP
E
FRRB203003.ai

MT-47
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

Parts (MC)

MC-1
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for u INSTRUCTION u

The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Each Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment 1.2 Types of Screws
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal The DT screw and the TP screw employed in the machine are of similar shape and color.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume. Check the screw type referring to the figures below when attaching a screw.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
DT screw TP screw
following precautions should be observed.
Has four dots on the head Has no dot on the head
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.
WARNING/CAUTION
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".
u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit.
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.
u INSTRUCTION u
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
as needed.
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators.
erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the inside of a broken part.
installation location when the part or component removed
is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in the illustration
CHECK that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image
components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
When you install the covers after a check, replacement, or adjustment, make sure that the
"n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
high-voltage switch is ON. After the machine is restored to normal, run an image read check
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when
to verify that a read image is normal.
installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated
for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or
preventing erroneous assembly procedures.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MC-1

MC-2
2. Table of Contents 5.23 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side),

IP Sensor Retaining Bracket MC-53
5.24 Roller (Small) Assembly MC-54
3. Cover 3. Cover MC-4 5.25 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side) MC-55
3.1 Cover MC-4 5.26 Cassette Set Base Assemblies MC-56
3.2 Board Box Cover MC-5 5.27 Side-Positioning Motor (MA2) MC-59
3.3 Left-hand Side Plate MC-5 5.28 Solenoid (SOLA1) MC-60
3.4 Bottom Cover MC-6 5.29 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8) MC-61
3.5 Back-Top Plate MC-7 5.30 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9) MC-62
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate MC-8 5.31 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Guide Plates,
3.7 Top Plate MC-9 Stopper MC-63
3.8 PNL Board MC-10 5.32 Small Size Cassette Guide Plates, Stopper MC-64
5.33 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly MC-65
4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit MC-11
5.34 Inch/Metric Side-positioning
4.1 Duct (Right) MC-11
Switch Motor Assembly MC-67
4.2 Duct (Left) MC-11
5.35 Side-positioning Detection Sensor (SA11) MC-68
4.3 Power Supply Assembly MC-12
5.36 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Guide HP
4.4 PSU37A Power Supply MC-14
Detection Sensor (SA12) MC-69
4.5 PSU37B Board MC-15
5.37 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor (MA5) MC-70
4.6 CPU Board MC-16
5.38 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Guide
4.6.1 Replacement Procedures MC-16
Driving Gear MC-71
4.6.2 Machine Data Backup MC-16
4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board MC-18 6. Erasure Unit 6. Erasure Unit MC-72
4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of 6.1 Erasure Unit MC-72
the RU and Console MC-22 6.2 Reflection Plate MC-73
4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version MC-23 6.3 Filter MC-74
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data MC-26 7. Conveyor Unit 7. Conveyor Unit MC-75
4.6.7 Confirming the S Value MC-27 7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side) MC-75
4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize MC-27 7.2 Turn Grip Roller Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1) MC-75
4.7 SND Board MC-28 7.3 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) MC-76
4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly MC-30 7.4 Conveyor Grip Driving/
4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet MC-31 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC2) MC-77
4.10 Fan (FAN1) MC-33 7.5 Rubber Rollers (A, B) MC-78
5. Cassette Set Unit 5. Cassette Set Unit MC-34 7.6 Rubber Rollers (C, D) MC-80
5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4) MC-34 7.7 Rubber Roller (E) MC-82
5.2 Shutter MC-35 7.8 Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-84
5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket MC-36 7.9 Grip Release Shaft MC-85
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit) MC-37 7.10 Rubber Roller (F) MC-87
5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly MC-38 7.11 IP Sensor (SC3) MC-88
5.6 Arm (White: Reference Side) MC-39 7.12 Antistatic Member MC-89
5.7 Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side) MC-40 8. Light-Collecting Unit 8. Light-Collecting Unit MC-90
5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3) MC-40 8.1 Light-Collecting Unit MC-90
5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1) MC-41 8.2 PMT Board MC-93
5.10 Guide (Small) MC-42 9. Scanning Optics Unit 9. Scanning Optics Unit MC-94
5.11 Inch/Metric Detection Sensor (SA16) MC-43 9.1 Scanning Optics Unit MC-94
5.12 Guide (Large) MC-43
5.13 HR Cassette Size Sensor Assembly (SA10) MC-44
5.14 IP Suction Arm MC-45
5.15 IP Pressdown Roller Assembly MC-46
5.16 Suction Cup MC-47
5.17 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) MC-49
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) MC-50
5.19 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7) MC-50
5.20 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear
(Reference Side) MC-51
5.21 IP Suction Pump (PA1) MC-52
5.22 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1) MC-53

MC-3
10. Subscanning Unit 10. Subscanning Unit MC-98
10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-98
10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-100
10.3 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and
Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly MC-101
10.4 Subscanning Grip Assembly MC-103
10.5 Kapton Belt MC-106
10.6 Tensioner MC-106
10.7 Flywheel (Large) MC-107
10.8 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1) MC-108
10.9 Rubber Belt MC-109
10.10 Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft) MC-109
10.11 Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft) MC-110
10.12 Center Roller MC-111
10.13 Rubber Roller (G) MC-113
10.14 Guide (A) MC-115
10.15 Rubber Roller (H) MC-116
10.16 Rubber Roller (I) MC-118
10.17 Guide (B) MC-120
10.13 Rubber Roller (J) MC-121
10.19 Light-collecting Mirror MC-123
11. Replacing the Fuses and 11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-125
Fuse Locations 11.1 Fuse Classification and
Replacement Procedures MC-125
11.2 CPU Board Fuses MC-126
11.3 SND Board Fuses MC-126
11.4 PSU37B Board Fuses MC-127
12. List of Jigs and Tools 12. List of Jigs and Tools MC-128
12.1 Jigs and Tools MC-128

MC-4
3. Cover
#6
PNL-A
3.1 Cover #4
TP3x6 (x6)
#6
n Removal Procedures PNL-B
(1) Remove the covers.
#1 Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1 #3
TP3x6 (x4),
#2 Front-bottom cover TP3x6 (x3) BR3x12 (x2)
#3 Back cover
#4 Top cover
#5 Front-top cover
#6 Connector (PNL-A - PNL-B)
u NOTE u
Remove the covers in the following order.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover : #1 #5
- Front-bottom cover : #1→#2 TP3x6 (x8)
- Back cover : #1→#3
- Top cover : #1→#3→#4
- Front-top cover : #1→#2→#3→#4→#5→#6
#1
TP3x6 (x3)
#2
TP3x6 (x4) PRMT010303001.ai
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
Must use the right-hand side cover with louver (cracks to exhaust air) when reinstalling the
right-hand side cover.

MC-5
3.2 Board Box Cover 3.3 Left-hand Side Plate
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

(1) Remove the cover. (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover} {MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover - Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
- Back cover - Back cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)} - Top cover
(2) Remove the left-hand side plate.
(2) Remove the board box cover. #1 Remove the screws.
#1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the left-hand side plate.
#2 Remove the board box cover.
u NOTE u
n Reinstallation Procedures Slightly push down the left-hand side plate while removing so that the left-hand side
plate does not get damaged by the top cover retaining bracket (A).
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the board box cover.

MC-6
3.4 Bottom Cover (3) Remove the bottom cover.
#1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the bottom cover.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.
CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.

MC-7
3.5 Back-Top Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures u NOTE u

(1) Remove the following components. Be sure to mount the back-top plate on the half punches and retain with the screws straightly.
{MC:3.1_Cover} Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image abnormalities.
- Back cover
(2) Remove the back-top plate.
#2 Remove the back-top plate.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the back-top plate as it is made from aluminum.

MC-8
3.6 Back-Bottom Plate (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to drop
the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the table.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to (6) Remove the back-bottom plate.
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the #1 Remove the screws.
table. #2 Remove the back-bottom plate.
(3) Remove the screws.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the back-bottom plate as it is made from aluminum.

MC-9
n Reinstallation Procedures 3.7 Top Plate
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
- Be sure to mount the back-bottom plate on the half punches and retain with the screws (1) Remove the following components.
straightly. Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image
{MC:3.1_Cover}
abnormalities.
- When reinstalling the back-bottom plate, lift up the machine a little bit. By doing so, you can - Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
easily insert the back-bottom plate between the machine and the bottom cover. - Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the top plate.
#2 Remove the top plate.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to deform the top plate as it is made from aluminum.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the top plate on the half punches and retain with the screws straightly.
Leakage of the light from the damaged threaded holes may cause image abnormalities.

MC-10
3.8 PNL Board (3) Remove the PNL board.
#1 Disconnect the connector.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the PNL board.
(1) Remove the following components. #2
{MC:3.1_Cover} PS3x6 (x2)
- Front-bottom cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A - PNL-B) #3
(2) Remove the PNL board assembly.
#1 Unclamp the clamp.
#1
CN1
#3 Remove the bracket.
#4
PS3x6 (x2) PRIT03030011.ai
#2
PS3x6 (x6) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#3
#1
PRIT03030010.ai

MC-11
4. Housing Unit 4.2 Duct (Left)
4.1 Duct (Right) (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
n Removal Procedures - Left-hand side cover
(2) Remove the duct (Left).
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover REFERENCE
The duct (left) is attached to the housing by engaging with the hook.
(2) Remove the duct (Right).
REFERENCE
The duct (right) is attached to the housing by engaging with the hook.

MC-12
4.3 Power Supply Assembly (3) Remove the Cable.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Unclamp the clamps.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screws.
When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground #4 Remove the metal clamps.
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may #2 #1
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply. INV-A, INV-B
(1) Remove the following components. #4
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover #2
- Front-bottom cover #1
- Front-top cover CN1
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right)} #3
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)} BR3x22 (x3)
{MC:4.8_Main Power Switch Assembly} #1
CN8
(2) Remove the cable protector. #4
#1 Remove the screws. #3 #1
#2 Remove the cable protector. DT3x6 (x2) CN2 #2 PRTM010304010.ai

MC-13
(4) Remove the power supply assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screws. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the power supply assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
When reinstalling the power supply assembly, exercise care not to have the cable enclosed
by the following frame caught between the machine and the power supply assembly.
PRIT03040018.ai

MC-14
4.4 PSU37A Power Supply (3) Remove the PSU37A power supply.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screws.
When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground #4 Remove the PSU37A power supply.
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front-top cover
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)}
{MC:4.3_Power Supply Assembly}
(2) Remove the power supply assembly cover.
#2 Remove power supply assembly cover.
#4
#3
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x6) PRIT03040011.ai

MC-15
4.5 PSU37B Board (3) Remove the PSU37B board.
CAUTION #3 Remove the PSU37B board.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front-top cover
{MC:4.2_Duct (Left)}
{MC:4.3_Power Supply Assembly}
(2) Remove the power supply assembly cover.
#2 Remove power supply assembly cover.
#4 Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#3
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x6) PRIT03040011.ai

MC-16
4.6 CPU Board 4.6.2 Machine Data Backup
The FLASH ROM of the CPU board stores the RU machine data (configuration information, u NOTE u
scanner information and log information). Since the CPU board shipped as a service part When the CPU board is replaced, network settings on the RU all restore to the default
does not contain the machine data set, it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it was settings. However, since the Console keeps the settings before the replacement, it cannot
before the replacement by updating the software version and adjusting the machine data be connected if the network settings have been modified to site-specific values. Temporarily
after replacement. change the network settings for re-connection. You need take a note of the addresses for the
purpose.
For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures depending on
the RU conditions. (1) Turn ON the power of the Console.
- When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up machine
data after the replacement of the CPU board. (2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU.
- When the machine cannot boot up and the machine data cannot be backed up, restore
(3) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
the machine-specific data by means of the machinespecific data CD-ROM attached to
the machine. If no machine-specific data CD-ROM is available, adjust the machine data {MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction. (4) When an FD (floppy disk) is to be used for backing up the machine data, insert a
new FD into the Console. If another recording medium is to be used, connect it to
the Console.
4.6.1 Replacement Procedures
u NOTE u
Replace the CPU board according to the procedures mentioned in the following reference When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk of the
list. Console, the procedure (4) need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure (5).
Reference Part concerned
(5) Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST OF
{4.6.2} Machine Data Backup EXISTING RU”.
{4.6.3} Replacing the CPU Board Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
{4.6.4} Setting the IP Address of the RU and Console RU IP ADDR
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION

{4.6.5} Updating the RU Software Version BACKUP RESTORE
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
{4.6.6} Restoring the Machine Data ALL RUs SETTING
Confirming the S Value

RBMC07101.AI
{4.6.7}
{4.6.8} S Value Correction/LED Initialize
u NOTE u
When the IP address of the RU of “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console of
“172.16.1.20” (initial value) are employed, the procedure (7) in “4.6.2 Machine Data Backup”
and the procedures of “4.6.4 Setting the IP addresses of the RU and the Console” need not
be taken.

MC-17
(6) Back up the "CONFIGURATION", "SCN OPTICAL DATA", "HISTORY LOG". (8) Write down the Internet settings of the Console.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
BACKUP #1 Click on [Network and Sharing Center] on the control panel.
CONFIGURATION
#2 Click on [View status].

RU IP ADDR
EXECUTE #2
→The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears.
BACKUP RESTORE
#1
#3 Click on [Properties].
ALL RUs SETTING
→The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears.

BACKUP #4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click on [Properties].
#3 SCN ALL DATA
#5 Take a note of the addresses of “IP address”, “Subnet mask” and “Default Gateway”.
EXECUTE #4
(9) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.
(10) Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable from the RU.
BACKUP
#5 HISTORY LOG
(11) Eject the FD from the Console when the machine data has been backed up on the
FD.
EXECUTE #6
(12) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
RBMC04101.AI
(7) Open the MUTL network address and take a note of the IP address. {MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}
Configuration(C)
RU IP Address
EACH RU SETTING
#1
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
172.16.1.10
BACKUP RESTORE
RU Subnet mask
ALL RUs SETTING
255.255.0.0 #2
RU PC-TOOL / MUTL
RU Default GateWay
172.16.1.0 #3
FTP IP Address
172.16.1.20 #4
RU Securety IP Address
0.0.0.0 #5
RU Securety Net Address

0.0.0.0 #6
RBMC04120.AI

MC-18
4.6.3 Replacing the CPU Board (3) Remove the cable junction bracket.
#2 Cut the insulation lock.
CAUTION #3 Disconnect the connector.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #4 Remove the screws.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body #5 Remove the cable junction bracket.
#3
CN2 #5
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #2
- Back cover
(2) Remove the cable protector.

#1 Remove the screws. #1 #1 #4
#2 Remove the cable protector.
DT3x6 (x4)
PRTM010304005.ai

MC-19
(4) Remove the CPU board.
#3 Remove the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
When disconnecting the connector (CN13), hold the position as indicated in the figure
and disconnect it straight. Otherwise, the cable might get damaged.
u NOTE u
The CPU board is equipped with the LAN port. When removing the CPU board, remove
the LAN port by drawing it out from the frame bracket.

MC-20
n Reinstallation Procedures l Meaning of DIP switch settings
(1) Make the DipSW settings of a new CPU board to be installed. Normal
No Item Meaning
setting
u INSTRUCTION u
A1 Erasure lamp type selection ON Sets the type of the erasure lamp.
- The DipSW (A3) must be set to ON. Otherwise, there will be a IP jam when to convey Set to ON for this machine.
the IP. To fix the IP jam, it is necessary to remove the covers to take the IP out straightly. OFF : Cathode lay tube type
- Make the DipSW settings of a new CPU board to be installed equal to those of the ON : LED type
removed CPU board. Otherwise, the machine will not work normally.
A2 Not used OFF Not used
A3 Mammography-enabled ON Sets the type of the machine.
machine/Mammography- Set to ON for this machine.
disabled machine OFF : Mammography-disabled machine
ON : Mammography-enabled machine
B1 For design OFF Nothing
B2 Machine selection ON Sets the type of the machine.
Set only B2 to ON in the machine.
B3 OFF
B4 OFF
B5 Standard type/high capacity ON Sets the type of the machine.
type selection Set to OFF for the standard type, and to ON for the
high capacity type.
Set to ON for this machine.
B6 15x30 IP usable/nonusable ON Set to ON in a machine with an IP of 15x30 size
applicable, and to OFF in a machine with an IP of
15x30 size not applicable.
Set to ON for this machine.
B7 Restoring applications OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PC-
(for troubleshooting) TOOL with the IP address of the RU fixed to
“172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console
When the IP addresses of fixed to “172.16.1.20” .
the RU and the FTP server OFF :“Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
are unknown. ON :“Initialize APL” can be executed.
B8 Not used OFF Not used
REFERENCE
Refer to the following for details of “CPU Board Setting Display”.
{MU:4.3 [3-1]_CPU Board Setting Display}

MC-21
(2) Reinstall the board.
{MC:4.6.1_Replacement Procedures}

MC-22
4.6.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console (6) Open the network address of MUTL and make settings of the site-specific values
noted in the procedure (7) of “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”.
(1) Set the Internet settings of the Console. Configuration(C)
RU IP Address
EACH RU SETTING
#1
CONNECTION TEST
#1 Click on [Network and Sharing Center] on the control panel.

RU IP ADDR
172.16.1.10
#2 Click on [View status]. BACKUP RESTORE
RU Subnet mask
→The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears. ALL RUs SETTING
255.255.0.0 #2
#3 Click on [Properties]. RU PC-TOOL / MUTL
RU Default GateWay
→The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears. 172.16.1.0 #3
#4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click on [Properties].
FTP IP Address
#5 Set the “IP address” and the “Subnet mask” in [Use the following IP address] to the #4
172.16.1.20
following default values.
IP address: 172.16.1.20 RU Securety IP Address
0.0.0.0 #5
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. RU Securety Net Address
0.0.0.0 #6
{MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
Update
(4) Select the RU whose address is to be changed from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”,
and input “172”, “16”, “1” and “10” in “RU IP ADDR”.
#7
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RBMC04121.AI
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION (7) Set the Internet settings of the Console to the site-specific settings noted in the
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x procedure (8) in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING

#2
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 RBMC04122.AI
(5) Confirm the PING results, and click on to exit from the window.
{MU:1.8_PING}

MC-23
4.6.5 Updating the RU Software Version (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
The RU software version is updated to update the RU software in the latest conditions. After #1
the updating, set the master CL.
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the Console.
#2
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
(2) Click on [START].
FRRB401007.ai
l [GOOD indication]
"value = 0 = 0x0" should be displayed.
l [NO GOOD indication]

Another message is displayed.
(5) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
RBMC04105.AI
(3) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF #2
EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP].
#1
LIST OF EXISTING RU
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU FRRB401008.ai
RU IP ADDR
#2
l [GOOD indication]
"Transfer complete" should be displayed.
BACKUP RESTORE

ALL RUs SETTING
RBMC04106.AI
Another message is displayed.

MC-24
(6) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF (10) Check the precautions for the installation.
EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP].
LIST OF EXISTING RU
CAUTION
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION Never turn OFF the power of the RU nor the Console during the write into the FLASH
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot restart.
Configuration(C)
(11) Verify that the FLASH ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU key.
RU IP ADDR
#2 #1
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
RBMC04109.AI
(7) Click on [OK].
RBMC04110.AI
(8) Verify the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].
RU VERSION
#1 x.x
#2
"Enter" RBMC04114.AI
#2 (12) Click on [OK].
RBMC04111.AI
(9) Click on [OK].

RBMC04115.AI
RBMC04112.AI

MC-25
(13) Verify the RU software version.

#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#2
RU IP ADDR
l GOOD indication
BACKUP RESTORE
The text is displayed in black.
l NO GOOD indication
The text is displayed in red or the
ALL RUs SETTING
version number is not displayed.
RBMC04116.AI
u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure (1), and again perform the
installation.


MC-26
4.6.6 Restoring the Machine Data (1) Select the RU whose machine data is to be restored from the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”.
The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU board. Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
Restore the backup data created in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”, and restore to the
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
u INSTRUCTION u
BACKUP RESTORE
- If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU board and you were ALL RUs SETTING
not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by means of the RBMC07101.AI
machine-specific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. (2) Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”.
- If no backup data or machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for the “format
RESTORE
adjustment” and “shading/sensitivity correction” to adjust the machine. Also perform “shading
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
CONFIGURATION
speed correction” when needed.

RU IP ADDR
EXECUTE #2
l Format adjustment
BACKUP RESTORE
#1
{MU:4.3 [6-4]_Format Adjustment} ALL RUs SETTING
l Shading/sensitivity correction
{MU:4.3 [6-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
RESTORE
l Shading speed correction #3 SCN ALL DATA
{MU:4.3 [6-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction} EXECUTE #4
RESTORE
#5 HISTORY LOG
EXECUTE #6
RBMC04104.AI

(4) Turn ON the main power switch of the RU.
(5) Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

MC-27
4.6.7 Confirming the S Value
(1) Confirm the S value.
{IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
4.6.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialize

(1) Correct the S value and initialize LED data.
{MU:4.3 [6-5-5]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
{MU:4.3 [6-8-3-1]_LED Initialize}

MC-28
4.7 SND Board (3) Remove the cable junction bracket.
#2 Cut the insulation lock.
CAUTION #3 Disconnect the connector.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #4 Remove the screws.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body #5 Remove the cable junction bracket.
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. #3
CN2 #5
{MC:3.1_Cover}
#2
- Back cover
(2) Remove the cable protector.

#1 Remove the screws. #1 #1 #4
#2 Remove the cable protector. DT3x6 (x4)
PRTM010304005.ai

MC-29
(4) Remove the SND board.
#3 Remove the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
When reinstalling the board, exercise care not to bring the fuse on the board into contact with
the brackets.

MC-30
4.8 Main Power Switch Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Left-hand side cover
(2) Remove the main power switch assembly.

#1 Disconnect the ground wires.
#2 Remove the screw.
#3 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals.
u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect while pressing the latch shaded in the figure below.
Latch
RBMC04018.AI

MC-31
4.9 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet (3) Remove the main power switch and the power supply inlet.
#1 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals.
n Removal Procedures u INSTRUCTION u

(1) Remove the following components. Disconnect while pressing the latch shaded in the figure below.
{MC:3.1_Cover} Latch
{MC:4.8_Main Power Switch Assembly}
(2) Remove the ferrite core.

RBMC04018.AI
(2)
PRTM010304003.ai
#2 Remove the main power switch.

#3 Remove the power supply inlet.

MC-32
u NOTE u
- Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet in the orientation as indicated in
the figure.
- Check that the main power switch is OFF.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to reinstall the ferrite core 10 mm away from the end of faston terminal.
Cable tie End of faston terminal
PRTM010304004.ai

MC-33
4.10 Fan (FAN1) n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. - Reinstall with the blowing direction of the fan directed as indicated by the arrow in the
figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover
(2) Remove the fan (FAN1).

#4 Remove the fan (FAN1).
- After the reinstallation, turn ON the power and confirm the air-breathing into the equipment.

MC-34
5. Cassette Set Unit n Reinstallation Procedures

5.1 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
(2) Remove the sensor (SA4).

#3 Remove the sensor (SA4).
#2
DT3x6
#1
#3
SA4
PRIT03050003.ai

MC-35
5.2 Shutter n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. Check that the torsion coil spring is placed as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the
shutter.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
(2) Remove the shutter.

#1 Press the shutter to the right and lift it.
#2 Remove the shutter.
#2 Torsion coil spring PRIT03050002.ai
#1
Torsion coil spring
PRIT03050001.ai

MC-36
5.3 Cover Retaining Bracket n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
(2) Remove the cover retaining bracket.

#3 Remove the Cover Retaining Bracket.
#1 #2
DT3x6 (x2)
#3
PRIT03050004.ai

MC-37
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit) n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
(2) Unclamp the clamp, and disconnect the connector.

#2
SA4
#1
PRIT03050005.ai
(3) Remove the cable junction bracket.

#2 Remove the cable junction bracket.
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x3)
PRIT03050006.ai

MC-38
5.5 Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly (3) Remove the bracket.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #2
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} #1
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} DT3x6 (x2)
PRIT03050008.ai
(2) Unclamp the clamp, and disconnect the connector.

(4) Remove the spring, the housing, and the bearing.
#1 Remove the spring.
#2 Remove the housing.
#3 Remove the bearing.
#2
SA3
#1
PRIT03050007.ai

MC-39
(5) Remove the spring, the housing, and the bearing. 5.6 Arm (White: Reference Side)
#1 Remove the spring.
#3 Remove the bearing. n Removal Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)}
(2) Remove the Arm (White: Reference Side).

(6) Remove the cassette cover closing roller assembly.
#1 Stir the cassette cover closing roller assembly.
#2 Remove the cassette cover closing roller assembly.
#1
PRIT03050009.ai

MC-40
5.7 Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side) 5.8 IP Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA3)

(1) Remove the following components. (1) Remove the following components.
- Front-bottom cover - Front-bottom cover
- Top cover - Top cover
- Front-top cover - Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) - Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} {MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.7_Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side)}
(2) Remove the Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side).
(2) Remove the IP suction arm HP sensor (SA3).
#1 Rotate the gear.
#4 Remove the IP suction arm HP sensor (SA3).
#1 #2
#1
SA3
PRIT03050010.ai
#4
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #3
DT3x6
PRIT03050011.ai

MC-41
5.9 IP Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA1) (3) Remove the gear.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) (3)
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} PRIT03050013.ai

(4) Disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the screw to remove the gear.
u NOTE u
Since the screw retaining agent is applied to the following screw, the screw has strong
tightening force. Use a box screwdriver (support size 5mm: for M2.5) and an adjustable
end wrench to remove the screw.

#2 Remove the gear.
(4)
MA1
PRIT03050014.ai
(5) Remove the screw to remove the IP suction arm driving motor assembly.
#2 #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the IP suction arm driving motor assembly.
#1
BR3x6 (3B) #2
PRIT03050012.ai
#1
DT3x6 (x4)
PRIT03050015.ai

MC-42
(6) Remove the screw to remove the IP suction arm driving motor. 5.10 Guide (Small)
#2 Remove the IP suction arm driving motor.
#2
{MC:3.1_Cover}
#1 - Back cover
TP4x8 (x2) - Top cover
PRIT03050016.ai
- Front-top cover
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. {MC:5.2_Shutter}
u NOTE u {MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
- Reinstall the IP suction arm driving screw with the connector located in the orientation as {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)}
indicated in the figure. {MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
(2) Remove the guide (small).

Connector #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the guide (small).
#2
PRIT03050017.ai
- Apply the screw retaining agent when reinstalling the screw (BR3x6) to retain the gear in #1
the removal procedure step 2. DT3x6 (x6)
PRTM010305019.ai

MC-43
5.11 Inch/Metric Detection Sensor (SA16) 5.12 Guide (Large)

{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)} {MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)}
{MC:5.2_Shutter} {MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} {MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly} {MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.10_Guide (Small)}
(2) Remove the guide (large).
(2) Remove the inch/metric detection sensor (SA16). #1 Remove the screws.
#1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the guide (large).
#2 Remove the inch/metric detection sensor (SA16).
#2
#1
DT3x6 (x6)
PRIT03050018.ai

MC-44
5.13 HR Cassette Size Sensor Assembly (SA10)
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly}
{MC:5.12_Guide (Large)}
(2) Remove the HR cassette size sensor assembly (SA10).

#2 Remove the cover.
#3 Remove the HR cassette size sensor assembly (SA10).
#3
#1
TP3x6
#4
SA10
#2
PRTM010305020.ai

MC-45
5.14 IP Suction Arm (3) Remove the guide on the opposite reference side.
#2 Remove the guide.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} (4) Remove the slide bearing and the bearing on the reference side.
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} #1 Remove the slide bearing.
{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} #2 Remove the bearing.
{MC:5.17_Cassette IN Sensor (SA1)}
{MC:5.19_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)}
{MC:7.5_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} (Only Rubber Rollers (A))
(2) Remove the slide bearing and the bearing on the opposite reference side.
#1 Remove the slide bearing.
(5) Remove the guide on the reference side.

#2 Remove the guide.

MC-46
(6) Remove the hose. 5.15 IP Pressdown Roller Assembly
(6) n Removal Procedures

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
PRIT03050019.ai
(2) Remove the IP pressdown roller assembly.
(7) Remove the IP suction arm. #1 Remove the screw.
#1 Stir the shaft of the IP suction arm on the reference side to the direction of the arrow. #2 Remove the IP pressdown roller assembly.
#2 Disengage the shaft of the IP suction arm on the reference side from the groove on
the frame and lift it.
#3 Remove the IP suction arm.
#1
#3
#2
PRIT03050020.ai

MC-47
5.16 Suction Cup (2) Remove the following components.
REFERENCE
n Removal Procedures Remove the suction cup by means of a Phillips screwdriver while pressing down the
hose joint with a wrench or the like.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #1 Remove the screw.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #2 Remove the guide.
- Front-bottom cover #3 Remove the screws.
- Back cover #4 Remove the suction cup assembly.
- Top cover #5 Remove the E-ring.
- Front-top cover #6 Remove the suction cup.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) #7 Remove the joint.
{MC:5.1_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA4)} #8 Remove the packing.
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)}
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:5.14_IP Suction Arm}

MC-48
u NOTE u
- Check that no foreign matter attaches to the sucking surface of the suction cup.
- Make sure that the KL ring is mounted in the right orientation as indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the suction cup assembly cannot be correctly mounted on the IP suction arm.
- Check that there is no excess of the hose in an area surrounded by the dotted line in the
figure. Otherwise, the hose might be pulled and get damaged when moving the IP suction
arm.
PRIT03050044.ai

MC-49
5.17 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) (3) Disconnect the connector to remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1).
REFERENCE
n Removal Procedures Remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1) while holding the arm as indicated in the figure.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover arm
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
(2) Rotate the gear.

PRIT03050023.ai

(2) #3 Remove the cassette IN sensor (SA1) while holding the arm.
#2
(DT3x6)
#3
PRIT03050021.ai
#1
SA1 PRIT03050022.ai

MC-50
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) 5.19 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)

{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)}
{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} {MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)}
(2) Remove the cassette hold sensor (SA2).
#1 Rotate the gear. (2) Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA6, SA7).
#2 Disconnect the connector. #1 Unclamp the clamps.
#3 Remove the screws. #2 Disconnect the connectors.
#4 Remove the cassette hold sensor (SA2). #3 Remove the screws.
#4 Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA6, SA7).
#4
#3
#4 DT3x6 (x2) #3
DT3x6 (x2) #2
SA6
#2 #2
SA2 SA7
#1
#1 PRIT03050025.ai
PRIT03050024.ai
n Reinstallation Procedures n Reinstallation Procedures

Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-51
5.20 Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side) (3) Remove the straight pin.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover (3)
{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} PRIT03050027.ai

(2) Remove the side-positioning mechanism driving gear (reference side).
u NOTE u
Reinstall the black gear in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
#4
(2)
PRIT03050026.ai

MC-52
5.21 IP Suction Pump (PA1) n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. - Put the IN hose connection between the hooks to reinstall the IP suction pump.
- Put the cable tie to align with the notches.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump.
- Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the IP suction pump (PA1).

#3 Remove the hose.
#4 Cut the cable ties.
#5 Remove the IP suction pump (PA1).
#2 #1
PA1 #5
#3
#4
PRTM010305028.ai

MC-53
5.22 Solenoid Valve Assembly (SVA1) 5.23 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side),
IP Sensor Retaining Bracket
(1) Remove the following components. n Removal Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
REFERENCE
The IP sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light receiving side in the
- Back cover
number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side has three pins.
- Top cover
(2) Remove the solenoid valve assembly (SVA1). (1) Remove the following components.
#1 Unclamp the clamp. {MC:3.1_Cover}

#2 Disconnect the connector. - Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
#3 Remove the hose. - Back cover
#4 Remove the screws. - Top cover
#5 Remove the solenoid valve assembly (SVA1).
(2) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light emitting side), IP sensor retaining bracket.
#5 #1 Unclamp the clamps.
#4 #3 #3 Remove the screws.
BR3x6 (x2) #4 Remove the IP sensor retaining bracket.
#2 #6 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light emitting side).
#1
SVA1
#4
#5 #3
TP3x6 DT3x6 (x2)
PRIT03050030.ai
#6
n Reinstallation Procedures #2
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. SA5 #1
PRTM010305029.ai

MC-54
5.24 Roller (Small) Assembly
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the roller (small) assembly.
#2 Remove the roller (small) assembly.

MC-55
5.25 IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side) (3) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side).
#2 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side).
REFERENCE
The IP sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light receiving side in the
number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side has four pins.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover n Reinstallation Procedures
- Top cover Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.24_Roller (Small) Assembly}
(2) Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side) assembly.

#2 Remove the IP sensor (SA5 : light receiving side) assembly.

MC-56
5.26 Cassette Set Base Assemblies (2) Remove the connector.
#2 Remove the connector from the cassette set base assemblies.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly} (3) Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:5.18_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.20_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.13_HR Cassette Size Sensor Assembly (SA10)}
{MC:5.14_IP Suction Arm} (4) Remove the screws on the reference side.
{MC:5.25_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Receiving Side)}

MC-57
(5) Remove the screws on the opposite reference side. (7) Remove the cassette set base assemblies.
(6) Disconnect the connectors.
(6) (6)
SA8 SA9
(6)
SA16 u NOTE u
- When removing the cassette set base assemblies, it interfere with the screw holes.
Therefore, push the side panels apart, tilt the assemblies aside, and lift up the other side
repeatedly as indicated in the figure in order to avoid the interference with the screw holes.
PRTM010305030.ai
- Do not push the side panels apart too hard.

MC-58

MC-59
5.27 Side-Positioning Motor (MA2) (2) Remove the motor.
#2 Remove the motor.
n Removal Procedures #3 Disconnect the connector.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.5_Cassette Cover Closing Roller Assembly} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.26_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}

MC-60
5.28 Solenoid (SOLA1) (4) Remove the screws while holding the solenoid (SOLA1) by hand.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front-top cover
(4)
(2) Unclamp the clamps to disconnect the connector. TP3x6 (x2) PRIT03050033.ai
#1 Unclamp the clamps. (5) Remove the solenoid (SOLA1).

#2
SOL1
#1
(5)
PRIT03050032.ai
(3) Put the cable aside to the direction of the arrow. PRIT03050035.ai
u NOTE u
Check that the solenoid (SOLA1) and the bracket are reinstalled as indicated in the figure.
(3)
PRIT03050034.ai
bracket
PRIT03050036.ai

MC-61
5.29 Small Cassette Size Sensor (SA8) (2) Remove the sensor.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.18_Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)} n Reinstallation Procedures

MC-62
5.30 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Sensor (SA9) (2) Remove the sensor.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.20_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-63
5.31 "15x30 IP width" Identifying Guide Plates, Stopper n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures REFERENCE

Refer to the following figure for reinstalling the guide plate and the stopper.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
(2) Remove the guide plate, stopper.

#2 Remove the guide plate.
#4 Remove the stopper.

MC-64
5.32 Small Size Cassette Guide Plates, Stopper n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
(2) Remove the guide plate, stopper.

#2 Remove the guide plate.
#4 Remove the stopper.

MC-65
5.33 Side-Positioning Guide Assembly (2) Remove the screws on the reference side.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
(3) Remove the screws on the opposite reference side.
(4) Remove the bracket.
{MC:5.23_IP Sensor (SA5 : Light Emitting Side), IP Sensor Retaining Bracket}
(Only IP Sensor Retaining Bracket)

MC-66
(5) Remove the screws. (9) Remove the side-positioning guide assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform the phase matching when reinstalling the side-positioning guide assembly.
- Be sure the inch/metric side-positioning switch guide driving gear is in meshing engagement
with the inch/metric side-positioning switch guide.
(7) Put the cable away from the bracket of side-positioning guide assembly.
- Be sure the protrusions of the inch/metric side-positioning switch guide can go through
center of SA11.
(8) Remove the E-ring.

MC-67
5.34 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor Assembly (2) Remove the motor assembly.
#2 Put the cable away from edge saddle.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the screws.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the motor assembly.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:7.5_Rubber Rollers (A, B)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:5.34_Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor Assembly}

MC-68
5.35 Side-positioning Detection Sensor (SA11) (2) Remove side-positioning detection sensor (SA11).
#2 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1
#2
- Front-bottom cover SA11
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} PRTM010305025.ai

{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.7_Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:7.5_Rubber Rollers (A, B)}
{MC:5.33_Side-Positioning Guide Assembly}

MC-69
5.36 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Guide HP Detection Sensor (2) Remove the inch/metric side-positioning guide HP detection sensor (SA12).
(SA12) #1 Disconnect the connector.

#2
{MC:3.1_Cover} DT3X6
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
#3
#1
{MC:5.2_Shutter} SA12
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} PRTM010305026.ai

{MC:5.6_Arm (White: Reference Side)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.7_Arm (White: Opposite Reference Side)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-70
5.37 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Motor (MA5) (2) Remove the inch/metric side-positioning switch motor (MA5).
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}

MC-71
5.38 Inch/Metric Side-positioning Switch Guide Driving Gear (2) Remove the inch/metric side-positioning switch guide driving gear.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the spacer.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the inch/metric side-positioning switch guide driving gear.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:5.19_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA6, SA7)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.20_Side-Positioning Mechanism Driving Gear (Reference Side)} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-72
6. Erasure Unit n Removal Procedures

(1) Remove the following component.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
6.1 Erasure Unit - Right-hand side cover
(2) Remove the erasure unit.
CAUTION #1 Disconnect the connector (ESR-CN1).
When servicing the erasure unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
#1
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may ESR-CN1
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.
u NOTE u
- When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot.
- There is a label attached to the erasure unit of PRIMA Tm. Be sure not to mix up the
erasure unit with the one of PRIMA T. PRTM010306001.ai
{Safety Precaution:2.3.4_Erasure Unit}

#3 Pull out the erasure unit.

MC-73
6.2 Reflection Plate n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. Check that the width around the center of the reflection plate is 6 ± 1 mm. If it is out of the
range, remove the reflection plate, and adjust the reflection plate.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Remove the reflection plate.
#2 Remove the reflection plate.
u NOTE u
- Do not strongly grasp the reflection plate and the filter, when removing the reflection
plate. Otherwise, the lamp located inside the filter might get damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection face of the reflection plate that has been removed. If it
gets damaged, IP erasure might not be performed normally.
n Adjust the Reflection Plate.

Push around the center of the reflection plate, and adjust a warp of the reflection plate.
Reinstall the reflection plate and make sure that the warp of the reflection plate is within an
appropriate range.

MC-74
6.3 Filter n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Exercise care not to smear the filter surface when removing/reinstalling the filter. Place the filter in the orientation as indicated in the figure to reinstall the filter.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:6.2_Reflection Plate}
(2) Remove the filter.
#3 Remove the filter from the half punch.
#4 Remove the filter.

MC-75
7. Conveyor Unit 7.2 Turn Grip Roller Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1)
7.1 Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side) (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
n Removal Procedures - Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover
(1) Remove the following components. - Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
- Back cover (2) Remove the turn grip roller mechanism HP sensor (SC1).
- Top cover
#2 Remove the sensor assembly.
(2) Remove the following components. #3 Disconnect the connector.
#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
#3 Remove the E-rings.
#4 Remove the spur gears.
#3
#4 SC1
#2 #1
DT3x6 (x2)
PRTM010307017.ai

MC-76
7.3 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:7.1_Conveying Mechanism Driving Gear (Left Side)}

connector
PRIT03070007.ai

MC-77
7.4 Conveyor Grip Driving/Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC2) (3) Remove the motor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:7.2_Turn Grip Roller Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1)}
(2) Remove the motor assembly.

#2 Unclamp the clamps. n Reinstallation Procedures
#4 Remove the motor assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#3
DT3x6 (x3)
#2
#4
#1
MC2
PRTM010307018.ai

MC-78
7.5 Rubber Rollers (A, B) (2) Move the IP suction arm forward by rotating the gear of the motor by hand.
n Roller Location
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front-bottom cover (3) Remove the following components.
- Back cover #1 Remove the E-ring.
- Top cover #2 Remove the spur gear.
- Front-top cover #3 Remove the spur gears.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) #4 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:5.3_Cover Retaining Bracket} #5 Remove the housings.
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket (Cassette Set Unit)} #6 Remove the bearings.

MC-79
(4) Remove the following components. (6) Remove the roller (B).
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#2 Remove the housings.
#3 Remove the bearings.
(5) Remove the roller (A).

MC-80
7.6 Rubber Rollers (C, D) (2) Remove the following components.
#1 Remove the spur gears.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the housings.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front-bottom cover (3) Remove the following components.
- Back cover
- Top cover #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
- Front-top cover #2 Remove the housings.
- Connector (PNL-A, PNL-B) #3 Remove the bearings.

MC-81
(4) Move the roller (C) forward.
(4)
PRIT03070016.ai
(5) Remove the roller (C).
u NOTE u
When removing the roller, exercise care not to bring the roller into contact with the
surroundings and damage it.
(5)
PRIT03070014.ai
(6) Remove the roller (D) as in step 5 and 6.

MC-82
7.7 Rubber Roller (E) (2) Remove the following components.
#2 Remove the cable protector.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.3_Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1)}

MC-83
(4) Remove the roller (E).
(4)
PRIT03070018.ai

MC-84
7.8 Conveyor Guide Assembly (3) Remove the screws.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.7_Rubber Roller (E)}
(2) Unclamp the clamps. #2 Remove the conveyor guide assembly.
#2
#1
SC3
PRIT03070021.ai
(2) PRIT03070019.ai Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-85
7.9 Grip Release Shaft (2) Remove the bearing.
#2 Remove the grip release shaft driving gear.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the screw.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the bearing retaining bracket.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #5 Remove the bearing.
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:7.2_Turn Grip Roller Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1)}
{MC:7.8_Conveyor Guide Assembly}
(3) Move the arm.
#2 Move the arm.
#3 Remove the pin.

MC-86
(4) Remove the grip release shaft. n Reinstallation Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform phase matching as the following image when reinstalling the grip release shaft
driving gear.

MC-87
7.10 Rubber Roller (F) (2) Remove the following components.
n Roller Location
{MC:3.1_Cover} (3) Remove the following components.
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}

MC-88
(4) Remove the roller (F). 7.11 IP Sensor (SC3)
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.7_Top Plate}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
n Reinstallation Procedures {MC:7.3_Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1)}
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. {MC:7.7_Rubber Roller (E)}

#2 Remove the IP sensor (SC3).

MC-89
7.12 Antistatic Member (2) Remove the antistatic members.
#2 Remove the antistatic member.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the bracket.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #5 Remove the screws.
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #6 Remove the antistatic member.
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:5.2_Shutter}
{MC:7.6_Rubber Rollers (C, D)}

MC-90
8. Light-Collecting Unit (2) Disconnect the connectors.

u INSTRUCTION u
8.1 Light-Collecting Unit Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in
the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are
wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover} (3) Remove the screws.
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly} u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the acrylic part of the light-collecting unit with a screwdriver
when removing the screws.

MC-91
(4) Remove the light-collecting unit. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, raise the light-collecting unit, and (1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
disengage from the hooks of the subscanning unit.
#2 Draw out the light-collecting unit with its upper part tilted forward, and remove.
u NOTE u
u INSTRUCTION u
- Insert the light-collecting unit along the guide of the subscanning unit.
Be sure to check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is disengaged from the
hooks of the subscanning unit before removing the light-collecting unit. Otherwise, the
tip of the light-collecting unit might get damaged.
- Check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is correctly engaged with the hooks of
the subscanning unit.
#3 Place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure. If
reversely placed, load is applied to the adhesive part of the photomultiplier, causing the
light-collecting unit to be damaged.
- Make sure that the connector (CN2) is correctly connected. Otherwise, an image with a
transparent portion will result.

MC-92
(2) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the light- n Check/Adjustment Procedures
collecting unit, and carry out “Initialize the LED data” of the MUTL, when the light-
collecting unit is replaced with a new one.
u INSTRUCTION u
(2) Restore the machine-specific data
When the light-collecting unit has been replaced with a new one, restore the attached
machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”. {MU:1.17_RESTORE}
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures} (3) Initialize the LED data.
{MU:4.3 [6-8-3-1]_LED Initialize}
(4) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(5) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

l No abnormal S-value is exhibited and image read normally takes place.

nonuniformity.

MC-93
8.2 PMT Board n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the board.
CAUTION Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to (2) When the board is replaced with a new one, recover the machine, and then
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body confirm the S-value.
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
(3) If the PMT board is replaced with a new one, perform the "SCN ALL DATA" backup
n Removal Procedures procedures.
(1) Remove the following components. {MU:1.16_BACKUP}
{MC:3.1_Cover} (4) Check the following points.
- Left-hand side cover l The RU normally enters the READY state.
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover}
{MC:10.1_Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
nonuniformity.
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit}
(2) Remove the board assembly.
#2 Slowly remove the board assembly.

MC-94
9. Scanning Optics Unit u NOTE u

Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the label
indicating how to place the scanning optics unit.
9.1 Scanning Optics Unit
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
CAUTION u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
Never touch the window of the scanning optics unit. If fingerprints or the like are left
on the window, the scanning optics unit must be replaced.
u NOTE u
If you are going to use the scanning optics unit that was used in another machine, install
it and then make a shading speed correction. After shading correction, back up the "SCN
OPTICAL DATA".
{MU:4.3 [6-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction}
Window of scanning optic unit

MC-95
n Removal Procedures (4) Remove the scanning optics unit.
(1) Remove the following components. #1 Hold the green label and pull up the scanning optics unit.
#2 Draw out the scanning optics unit forward in parallel, and remove it.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
u NOTE u
- Left-hand side cover Raise the scanning optics unit to a position where the four holes on the unit do not
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover} interfere with the screw head, and pull out the unit.
{MC:10.2_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}
(2) Disconnect the connectors.
(3) Loosen the screws.
(4) Place the scanning optics unit.

u INSTRUCTION u
Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the scanning optics unit.

MC-96
n Reinstallation Procedures (2) Make sure that the cable is routed as shown in the figure below, after the light-
collecting unit is installed.
(1) Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
(3) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the scanning
u INSTRUCTION u optics unit, after the machine is restored exactly as it was.
- When the scanning optics unit is to be replaced, install the unit after peeling a dust tight
u INSTRUCTION u
tape applied to the window of the scanning optics unit.
- Check that the scanning optics unit is correctly put on the retaining screw. When the scanning optics unit has been replaced with a new one, always restore the
attached machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:9.1_Scanning Optics Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
- Tighten the retaining screw while pressing the scanning optics unit against the
positioning pin.

MC-97
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
(2) Restore the machine-specific data.
{MU:1.17_RESTORE}

nonuniformity.

MC-98
10. Subscanning Unit (3) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
10.1 Post-reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:3.4_Bottom cover}

MC-99
n Reinstallation Procedures (3) Reinstall the screws.
(1) Place the post-reading conveyor guide assembly on the guide of the subscanning
unit.
(2) Insert the edge of the sheet in between the brackets.
(4) Mount the upper side of the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
#1 Locate the upper part on the half punch.
#2 Reinstall the screws.

MC-100
10.2 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) (3) Remove the sensor.
#1 Loosen the screw.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:3.4_Bottom Cover}
(2) Disconnect the connector.
u NOTE u
Place the sensor in the orientation as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the sensor.

MC-101
10.3 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.
Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly
(1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
(2) Disconnect the connectors. CAUTION

#1 Unclamp the clamp. When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
#2 Disconnect the connectors. drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.
(5) Remove the bottom cover.


(3) Reinstall the back cover.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
u NOTE u
When you put the back side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the back cover.

MC-102
(7) Remove the motor assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screws. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the motor assembly.
u NOTE u
- Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
Connector
- When reinstalling the motor assembly, tighten the screw while pressing the bracket against
the shaft.
u NOTE u
When removing the screws, nudge down the back cover a little bit.
(8) Remove the motor and sensor. Shaft

#1 Remove the screws. Bracket

MC-103
10.4 Subscanning Grip Assembly (4) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right}
{MC:4.6_CPU Board} CAUTION
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate} the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the table.
{MC:10.5_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly} (5) Unclamp the clamps.
(5)
PRTM010310010.ai

u NOTE u
When removing the screws, nudge down the back cover a little bit.
(3) Reinstall the bottom cover.

u NOTE u
When you put the bottom side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the bottom cover.

MC-104
(7) Remove the subscanning grip assembly. #5 Remove the subscanning grip assembly.
#3 Slide the bearing.
#4 Move the bracket, and remove the pin of the subscanning grip assembly from the
guide hole.

MC-105
n Reinstallation Procedures - Make sure that the flange of the subscanning grip assembly is correctly fitted into the cam
groove. Otherwise, abnormalities in images will result.
Flange Flange
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
- Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly by inserting its pin into the guide hole.
Groove Groove
GOOD NO GOOD RBMC09111.AI
- Put the spring between the cams. If the spring is disengaged, rotate the shaft and put the
spring between the cams.

MC-106
10.5 Kapton Belt 10.6 Tensioner

(1) Remove the components in the following order. (1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate} {MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:10.5_Kapton Belt}
(2) Remove the kapton belt.
#1 Put away the tensioner. (2) Remove the tensioner.
#2 Remove the kapton belt. #1 Remove the spring.
#3 Remove the tensioner.
#1
#2 PRTM010310013.ai
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Reinstallation Procedures

MC-107
10.7 Flywheel (Large) #2 Remove the screw.
#3 Remove the flywheel (large).
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the flywheel (large).

#1 Insert an Allen wrench into the hole in the rubber roller (H).

MC-108
10.8 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1) n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
(2) Remove the sub scanning motor assembly.

#3 Remove the sub scanning motor assembly.
#1
MZ1
#3
#2
DT3x6 (x3) PRTM010310016.ai
(3) Remove the sub scanning motor (MZ1).

#2 Remove the sub scanning motor (MZ1).

MC-109
10.9 Rubber Belt 10.10 Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft)

(1) Remove the components in the following order. (1) Remove the components in the following order.
{MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate} {MC:3.3_Left-hand Side Plate}
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate} {MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate}
{MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate} {MC:3.6_Back-Bottom Plate}
{MC:10.5_Kapton Belt} {MC:10.5_Kapton Belt}
{MC:10.7_Flywheel (Large)} {MC:10.7_Flywheel (Large)}
{MC:10.9_Rubber Belt}
(2) Remove the rubber belt.
(2) Remove the flywheel (small: main driving shaft).
(2)
PRTM010310018.ai

MC-110
10.11 Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft) (4) Remove the bottom cover.
{MC:7.6_Rubber Rollers (C, D)}
(1) Remove the components in the following order. (5) Remove the flywheel (small: driven shaft).
{MC:3.1_Cover} #1 Insert an Allen wrench into the hole in the rubber roller (J).
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #2 Remove the screw.
- Back cover #3 Remove the flywheel (small: driven shaft).
- Top cover
{MC:10.7_Flywheel (Large)}
(2) Reinstall the back cover.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
u NOTE u
When you put the back side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the back cover.
CAUTION
When you place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure, be careful not to
drop the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the
table.

MC-111
10.12 Center Roller (2) Remove the bearing.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the bearing.
#2
#3
(1) Remove the components in the following order. #1
DT3x6 (x2)
{MC:3.1_Cover} PRTM010310023.ai
- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover (3) Remove the center roller.
- Back cover
#1 Remove the center roller.
- Top cover
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:10.3_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly}
{MC:10.4_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
{MC:10.10_Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft)}
{MC:10.11_Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft)}
REFERENCE
You do not need to remove the bracket of the reference side.

MC-112
REFERENCE
Place the center roller with the side which is longer from shaft end to E-ring facing the
opposite reference side.

MC-113
10.13 Rubber Roller (G) (2) Remove the hook (reference side).
#2 Remove the hook.
n Roller Location
#1
#2
PRTM010310025.ai
n Removal Procedures (3) Remove the hook (opposite reference side).

(1) Remove the components in the following order. #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #2 Remove the hook.
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} #1
{MC:4.6_CPU Board} #2
{MC:10.10_Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft)} PRTM010310026.ai

MC-114
(4) Remove the rubber roller (G).
#3 Remove the guides (white).
#4 Remove the rubber roller (G).
#2
#2
#3 #1
#4 E4
#1 #3
E4
PRTM010310027.ai

MC-115
10.14 Guide (A) (3) Place the unit in the orientation indicated in the figure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.6_CPU Board} CAUTION
{MC:3.5_Back-Top Plate} the unit, upset the unit, or have your fingers caught between the unit and the table.
{MC:10.3_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Assembly} (4) Remove the back cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
{MC:10.5_Kapton Belt} - Back cover
{MC:10.9_Rubber Belt} (5) Remove the guide (A).
{MC:10.10_Flywheel (Small: Main Driving Shaft)} #1 Remove the screws.
{MC:10.11_Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft)} #2 Remove the guide (A).
{MC:10.13_Rubber Roller (G)}

u NOTE u
When you put the bottom side of the machine facing down, temporarily reinstall the bottom cover.

MC-116
10.15 Rubber Roller (H) (2) Remove the bearing.
n Roller Location #3 Remove the bearing.
{MC:3.1_Cover} (3) Remove the rubber roller (H).
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:3.2_Board Box Cover} (3)
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:10.5_Kapton Belt} PRIT03100046.ai
{MC:10.13_Rubber Roller (G)}
{MC:10.14_Guide (A)}

MC-117
REFERENCE
The roller (H) makes the perforated shaft end towards the reference side.

MC-118
10.16 Rubber Roller (I) (2) Remove the hook (reference side).
#2 Remove the hook.
n Roller Location
#1
#2
(1) Remove the components in the following order. PRIT03100047.ai
{MC:3.1_Cover} (3) Remove the hook (opposite reference side).

- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
- Back cover #2 Remove the hook.
- Top cover
{MC:4.1_Duct (Right} #1
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
#2
{MC:10.11_Flywheel (Small: Driven Shaft)} PRTM010310030.ai

MC-119
(7) Remove the rubber roller (I).
#3 Remove the guides (white).
#4 Remove the rubber roller (I).
#2 #2
#3
#1 #3 #1
#4 E4
E4
PRIT03100049.ai

MC-120
10.17 Guide (B) n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
{MC:10.16_Rubber Roller (I)}
(2) Remove the guide (B).

#2 Remove the guide (B).

MC-121
10.13 Rubber Roller (J) (2) Remove the hook (reference side).
#2 Remove the hook.
n Roller Location
#1
#2
(1) Remove the components in the following order. PRIT03100047.ai
{MC:3.1_Cover} (3) Remove the bearing.

- Right-hand side cover, Left-hand side cover #1 Remove the screws.
- Back cover #2 Remove the bracket.
- Top cover #3 Remove the bearing.
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}

MC-122
(4) Remove the rubber roller (J).
REFERENCE
The roller (J) makes the perforated shaft end towards the reference side.

MC-123
10.19 Light-collecting Mirror (3) Remove the components (opposite reference side).
#1 Remove the KL-ring.
#2 Remove the spur gear.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the bearing.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Back cover
- Top cover
{MC:4.6_CPU Board}
(4) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
(2) Remove the components (reference side).

#2 Remove the KL-ring.
#3 Remove the arm.
(4)
PRTM010310035.ai

MC-124
u INSTRUCTION u
Reinstall the light-collecting mirror under the pin on the frame.

MC-125
11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations n Fuse Replacement Procedures
CAUTIONS
11.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
n Fuse Classification - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated
l How to understand fuse notations amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. - To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
(1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
Rated amperage of
1.6A
Fuse classification
symbol
[Remove]
Fuse
RBMC10005.AI
Pin
RBMC10004.AI

MC-126
11.2 CPU Board Fuses 11.3 SND Board Fuses
n Fuse Location n Fuse Location
n Fuse Information n Fuse Information

Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A) Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F7 LM 48 V 1A F8 LM 48 V 1A
F13 LM 48 V 1.6 A F9 LM 48 V 2A
F19 LM 48 V 1A F10 LM 48 V 2A
F20 LM 48 V 1.6 A

MC-127
11.4 PSU37B Board Fuses
n Fuse Location
n Fuse Information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F1 - 250 V 6.3 A
F2 - 250 V 10 A
u NOTE u
Since F1 and F2 are directly mounted on the PSU37B board, the fuse itself cannot be
replaced. If F1 or F2 has blown out, replace the whole PSU37B board with a new one.
{MC:4.5_PSU37B Board}

MC-128
12. List of Jigs and Tools
12.1 Jigs and Tools

No applicable component

MC-129
BLANK PAGE

MC-130
BLANK PAGE

MC-131
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Maintenance Utility (MU)

MU-1
1. RU PC-TOOL 1.1.2 Tree Diagram

RU PC-TOOL
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer.
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the EACH RU SETTING
Console to RU, are performed on the Console connected to the RU via the network.
CONNECTION TEST
1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree {MU:1.4_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
{MU:1.11_INSTALL}
{MU:1.5_NEW}
1.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:1.12_VERSION UP}
{MU:1.6_DELETE}
{MU:1.13_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:1.7_MUTL}
{MU:1.14_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:1.8_PING}
{MU:1.15_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:1.9_MON}
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
{MU:1.10_FTP}
{MU:1.17_RESTORE}
{MU:1.18_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:1.19_ERROR DB}
ALL RUs SETTING
{MU:1.20_UNINSTALL : ALL RUs}
{MU:1.21_VERSION UP : ALL RUs}
Configuration
{MU:1.22_CDPath}
Operation
{MU:1.23_Initialize APL}
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual MU-1

MU-2
1.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL 1.3 Maintenance Mode
n Starting RU PC-TOOL n RU Maintenance Display

(1) Press the [Window] key on the keyboard, and open the Start menu of Windows. “PC” flashes on the operation panel when the RU is under maintenance.
Some operations including cassette insertion are not allowed while “PC” flashes.
(2) Open the [Run...] window from the Start menu of Windows. Specify "C:/Program
Files/FujiFilm/FCR/TOOL/RuPcTool/RuPCTool.exe", and click on [OK].
n Canceling the RU Maintenance Display
n Exiting RU PC-TOOL You can cancel the maintenance display by pressing the [Stand-by switch] while pressing the
(1) Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of RU PC-TOOL. [Eraser button] on the operation panel.
Canceling the maintenance display, operation including the cassette insertion is allowed.
(2) Turn OFF the power of the RU.

MU-3
1.4 LIST OF EXISTING RU 1.5 NEW
n Function n Function
Upon installing the RU software, a data folder corresponding to each machine is created in Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME"
the FTP server. The list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server are listed in “LIST and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew.
OF EXISTING RU”. Used to execute the following commands in the RU input in the “RU NAME” and “RU IP
ADDR” fields if not displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” field.
- MUTL - PING
- MON - INSTALL
n Procedures
Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU (1) Click on [NEW].
has not been installed normally. (2) Input the RU name and the IP address of the RU.
REFERENCES Configuration(C)
- For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE" field, uninstall it and then install the
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
RU software again.
- If "VERSION" is displayed in red, it indicates that the version of the RU software has not BACKUP RESTORE
been updated. Update the version as needed.

ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB401004.ai
(3) Execute the respective commands.

MU-4
1.6 DELETE 1.7 MUTL
Used to delete a folder of the RU stored in the FTP server and also to delete it from "LIST OF Used to start the maintenance utility (MUTL) of the RU service utility.
EXISTING RU". MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of the
When reinstallation is required in such a case where the machine is to be used with the IP reading start position and reading width, as well as board checks.
address of the RU changed, use the “DELETE” command.
n Procedures
n Procedures {MU:4._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.
(2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(3) Click on [DELETE].

→ The confirmation window appears.
(4) Click on [OK].
(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST OF
EXISTING RU."

MU-5
1.8 PING
n Function
Used to execute the "PING" command for the RU.
When you click on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears where you can check
whether or not the network connection from the Console to the RU is normal.
n Procedures
(2) Click on [PING].

→ The “command prompt” window appears.
(3) Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
#2
#1
FRRB401005.ai
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |

Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).

MU-6
1.9 MON n Details of Items
(A) I/O name

n Function The I/O name is displayed.
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes Symbol Name
its status. No ON/OFF indication appears for the motor. SA01 Cassette IN sensor
(A) (B) (C) (D)
SA02 Cassette hold sensor
SA03 Suction arm HP sensor
SA04 Cassette ejection sensor
SA05 IP length sensor
SA06 IP protrusion prevention guide HP sensor
SA07 Side-positioning sensor
SA08 Small cassette size sensor
SA09 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 HR cassette size sensor
SA11 Side-positioning detection sensor
SA12 Inch/metric side-positioning guide HP detection sensor
PRTM010401001.ai
SA16 Inch/metric detection sensor
SC01 Turn grip roller mechanism HP sensor
n Procedures
SC03 IP sensor 1
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". SZ02 Subscanning grip sensor
(2) Click on [MON]. * The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears. (B) Status

Displays one of statuses, OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ depending on the change of
the I/O conditions.
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
(C) Other information
has changed.
No display.
REFERENCES
(D) Status changed time
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However,
Displays the time when the I/O status changes.
the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to REFERENCE
resume the monitor function.
You can copy, cut, paste and delete the characters appearing on the monitor window.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.

MU-7
1.10 FTP (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
#2
n Function
Used to check the network for the RU selected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and to check #1
the operation of the FTP server for the Console.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the Console are normal.
n Procedures
FRRB401008.ai
(2) Click on [FTP]. l [GOOD indication]

"Transfer complete" appears.
→ Two windows appear.
(3) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK]. Any other message appears.
#1
#2
FRRB401007.ai
l [GOOD indication]
“value=0=0x0” should be displayed.

Any other message appears.

MU-8
1.11 INSTALL n Procedures
CAUTION (2) Click on [NEW], and input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR” of the RU to be
Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power, the installed.
RU fails to start up because the contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted. {MU:1.5_NEW}
(3) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
u NOTE u
{MU:1.8_PING}
Restart the Console PC if “errCode=421” appears on the command prompt window during
installation. (4) Click on [INSTALL].
#1
n Function
Used to install the RU software into the RU entered in the "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR"
fields. Upon installation, an RU folder is created in the FTP server.
REFERENCE
The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the
settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU board of the RU to identify the type. FRRB401021.ai
(5) Click on [OK].
#1
FRRB401022.ai
→ The setting window for the installation conditions appears.

MU-9
(6) Set the installation conditions, and click on [OK]. (10) Click on [OK].
#1 #1
FRRB401026.ai
#2 → The RU PC-TOOL window restores.

FRRB401023.ai
→ Installation starts. (11) Check that the RU you have installed is displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
(7) Set “CONFIGURATION”, and click on [SET]. #1

(8) Set the master CL, and click on [SET].

FRRB401027.ai
#1
#2
FRRB401024.ai
→ The command prompt window appears, and the file is copied.
(9) Press the key according to the instruction on the window.
FRRB401025.ai

MU-10
1.12 VERSION UP n Procedures
CAUTION (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
Never turn OFF the RU power during version update. {MU:1.8_PING}
The contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
(3) Click on [VERSION UP].
n Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
REFERENCE
The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize #1
the device type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on
the CPU board of the RU to identify the device type.
FRRB401028.ai
(4) Click on [OK].
#1
FRRB401022.ai
→ The version selection window appears.
(5) Select the version, and click on [OK].
#1
#2
FRRB401029.ai

MU-11
(6) Click on [OK]. (10) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
#1
FRRB401030.ai
→ Version update starts.
(7) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.
FRRB401031.ai
(8) Click on [OK].
#1
FRRB401032.ai
→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
(9) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has changed.
#1
FRRB401033.ai

MU-12
1.13 EDIT HISTORY n Details of Items
l Details of USE
n Function No. Item Function
HISTORY information (including the number of IP’s processed by the RU, lighting time of
Displays the date when the RU software is installed. A specific
the erasure lamp, etc.) of the RU is displayed. Clear or edit the information when a unit has 1 INSTALLATION DATE
date can be entered manually.
been replaced or other occasions.
A total count of a period of time when the RU power is turned
TOTAL POWER ON
n Procedures 2 ON is displayed. A specific numerical value can be entered
TIME
manually.
(2) Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. l Details of IP
→ The "EDIT HISTORY" window appears. No. Item Function
(3) Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. 1 RESET Resets each item.
Refer to the detailed description of each item for details of the contents appearing on the Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
screen. 2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
(4) Click on [SET].
TOTAL READING Counts the total count that normal reading takes place per IP
3
COUNTER size, and displays the total in “ALL IP SIZES”.
TOTAL PROCESSING Displays the total count that normal reading and erasure take
4
COUNTER ALL IP SIZES place. A specific numerical value can be entered manually.
PARTS PROCESSING Displays the number of times the part of interest is used.
5
COUNTER Specific numerical values can be entered manually.
l Details of LASER
No. Item Function
1 RESET Resets each item.

Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
2 SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
TOTAL TIME FOR THE Displays the total laser lighting time. A specific numerical
3
LASER ON value can be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total laser lighting count. A specific numerical
4
THE LASER ON value can be entered manually.

MU-13
l Details of LAMP 1.14 EDIT CONFIGURATION
- THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING
No. Item Function
n Function
1 RESET Resets each item.
Used to edit the CONFIGURATION information for the RU.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed. The set information is written into the FLASH ROM of the RU.
entered. A specific date can be entered manually. CAUTION
TOTAL TIME FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting time. A specific The LED panel of the RU lights up while the FLASH ROM of the RU is being updated.
3 THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually. Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
LIGHTING If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting count. A specific
4 THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING n Procedures
- THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING
No. Item Function (2) Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
1 RESET Resets each item. →The "EDIT CONFIGURATION" window appears.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed. (3) Set the respective CONFIGURATION items.
(4) Click on [SET].
TOTAL COUNT FOR A total of the lighting count of the lamp since the erasure lamp (5) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
3 THE ERASURE LAMP is replaced is displayed. A specific numerical value can be (6) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.
CLEANING entered manually.
n Details of Items
No. Item Function
Sets the identification code (1-digit capital) with which the user
EQUIPMENT CODE identifies the RU which has read the image when a plurality of
1
(A-Z) RU’s are used. The identification code is printed on the output film.
The default is A.
Sets the period of time since “primary erasure” is selected by the
ERASE MODE TIME “erasure” button of the RU until “Image reading” is automatically
2
OUT (0-999[s]) restored in the unit of second. When “0” is set, the mode is kept
changed to “primary erasure”. The default is 20 seconds.
Determines whether the alarm sounds when a cassette is set.
Confirmation Alarm
3 - ON (default): An alarm sounds.
when cassette is set
- OFF: No alarm sounds.
Selects the kind of IP (inch or metric) to be used in the machine.
- INCH:
4 IP Size Code Setting Select when inch IP’s are to be used.
- METRIC (default):
Select when metric IP’s are to be used.

MU-14
No. Item Function No. Item Function
Selects the read speed mode of the IP. Sets the timing when the erasure lamp cleaning message is displayed.
- None : Not used. - OFF (default):
- DS (default) : When the high-capacity type is installed, images The message is not displayed.
Standard Read Speed on the 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) or 14" x 14" (35cm - 6000 or 365 days:
5
Setting x 35cm) size IPs are read in the high-capacity The message is displayed when the total count of IP
mode. conveyance of 6000 is reached or 365 days elapses.
- GR : Images on any size of the IPs are read in the - 3000 or 182 days:
standard mode. The message is displayed when the total count of IP
CONDITION OF ERASE
Determines whether the warning on the laser life is to be only 11 conveyance of 3000 is reached or 182 days elapses.
LAMP CLEANING
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed - 12000 or 730 days:
in the error message. The message is displayed when the total count of IP
6 WARNING OF LD LIFE - LOG ONLY (default): conveyance of 12000 is reached or 730 days elapses.
Only write into the error log. - OPTIONAL:
- LOG & MESSAGE: The message is displayed when an optional total count of IP
Write into the error log and display of the error message. conveyance or an optional number of days is reached.
Determines whether the warning on the erasure lamp life is to The count and the number of days are set by the commands of
be only written into the error log or written into the error log and Nos. 12 and 13.
displayed in the error message. CONDITION OF Sets the total count of IP conveyance when “OPTIONAL” is
WARNING OF LAMP
7 - LOG ONLY (default): ERASE LAMP selected in the command No.11.
LIFE 12
Only write into the error log. CLEANING [COUNT] The default is 6000.
- LOG & MESSAGE: (OPTIONAL)
Write into the error log and display of the error message. CONDITION OF Sets the number of days when “OPTIONAL” is selected in the
Determines whether the warning on the part life is to be only ERASE LAMP command No.11.
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed 13
CLEANING [DAYS] The default is 365 days.
in the error message. (OPTIONAL)
WARNING OF PARTS
8 - LOG ONLY (default):
LIFE Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when the [Eraser
Only write into the error log.
button] and the [Stand-by switch] are pressed.
- LOG & MESSAGE: 14 Key Touch Sound
- ON (default): An alarm sounds.
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
- OFF: No alarm sounds.
Determines whether the warning on the S value is to be only
Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when an error occurs.
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
15 Alarm Sound - ON (default): An alarm sounds.
in the error message.
9 WARNING OF S VALUE - OFF: No alarm sounds.
- LOG ONLY:
Only write into the error log. Determines whether or not the sleep mode is to be used.
- LOG & MESSAGE (default): 16 Sleep Mode Change - ON: The sleep mode is used.
Write into the error log and display of the error message. - OFF (default): The sleep mode is not used.
Determines whether or not the error is to be regularly displayed Sleep Mode Change Sets the time for transiting to the sleep mode.
17
on the display. Time ([min]) The default is 60 minutes.
10 Regular error display
- ON (default): The error is regularly displayed. Determines whether or not to enable to release errors using the
- OFF: The error is not regularly displayed. erasure mode switching button.
RELEASE ERROR - OFF (default) : Errors cannot be released using the erasure
18
(Mode Button) mode switching button.
- ON : Errors can be released using the erasure mode
switching button.
WAKE ON LAN PORT Sets the port No. to be used for Wake On LAN.
19
NO The default is 6001.

MU-15
No. Item Function 1.15 EDIT CL NAME
Sets the speed of the IP removal arm.
IP Removal Arm Speed The default is “-#46767316”.
20
Change For PRIMA Tm, the speed of the IP removal arm stays constant
n Function
regardless of this setup content. Used to edit/add the Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master
CL's.
n Procedures for Editing/Adding the Console as Image Transfer Destination

(1) Select from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" an RU where the Console as the image
transfer destinations is to be edited or added, and click on [EDIT CL NAME].
→ “CL NAME” window appears.
(2) To edit, select the Console to be edited, and then click on [MODIFY]; to add, click
on [NEW].
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
(3) Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET].
(4) Click on [SET].

n Procedures for Setting the Master CL

(1) Select the CL to be set as the master CL from those appearing on the “CL NAME”
window.
(2) Click on [>>] button, and click on [SET].


MU-16
1.16 BACKUP n Procedures
You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for
backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the Console are
n Function selectable.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information, error log data or the like from the FLASH
Select the item to be backed up with
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
ROM of the RU to a recording medium such as an FD. You can back up the following data.
the RU PC-TOOL, and then click on

RU IP ADDR
l "ERROR LOG"
BACKUP RESTORE
"EXECUTE".
Log data is backed up.
ALL RUs SETTING
l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is backed up. To change the backup location,
l "TRACE LOGS" click on .
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.
l "LOG ALL"
All of “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” are backed up at a time. Only the drives and directories
recognized by the Console are
l "SCN ALL DATA" displayed as the locations available
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are backed up at a time. for backup.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Choose a backup location (by double-clicking it).

Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.
The selected
location
appears.
FRRB401010.ai

MU-17
1.17 RESTORE n Procedures
You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying the drive and
directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by
n Function the Console are selectable.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information and machine-specific data from a recording
Select the item to be restored
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
medium such as an FD to the FLASH ROM of the RU. The items to be restored include:
CONNECTION TEST
with the RU PC-TOOL, and then

RU IP ADDR
l "CONFIGURATION" BACKUP RESTORE

click on "EXECUTE".
Configuration data is restored. ALL RUs SETTING
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored. Click on to change
l "SCN ALL DATA" the region to restore.
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are restored at a time.

Light collecting system data among the scanner data is restored.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"

Of the scanner data, optical data is restored. Only the drives and directries
recognized by the Console are
REFERENCE displayed as regions to which
The contents copied in the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the main power the data can be restored.
switch of the RU and again turning it ON.
Select (double-click) the region to restore.
The selected
location
appears.
FRRB401011.ai

MU-18
1.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function
The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
n Function displayed on the Timing Chart screen.
The I/O trace data is displayed in a timing chart. The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
2 "Pass" text box
You can check operations including the reading of cassettes, erasure, and conveyance check chart is entered.
in the RU PC-TOOL MUTL. The display scale for the time base (horizontal
Note that only the I/O trace data can be displayed. 3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
1 2 3 4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
5 pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
4 - B: Time elapsed from power ON to the position

pointed by the right mouse button.

- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the [CLEAR] button is clicked, the values in the
A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
n Procedures
(1) Back up the "LOG ALL".
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}

A B A-B 6
(3) Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
FRRB401012.ai
→The "I/O TRACE EXPERT" window appears, and the latest trace data is displayed.

MU-19
1.19 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
n Function Of the error log files, only "FATAL" errors are
2 “FATAL" button
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of displayed.
the RU. Of the error log files, only "WARNING" errors are
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
7 Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
9 The latest error log data is copied from the CPU
6 “UPDATE” button
board of the RU to the FTP server of the Console.
11
The contents of the error log file selected are
displayed.
8 12 7 Error message list box Displays the name and occurrence conditions on the
bottom of the window, when selecting the displayed
data.
13
10 8 “Error Code” text box Displays the code of the selected error message.
9 “Error Name” text box Displays the name of the selected error message.
Displays the occurrence conditions of the selected
10 “Meaning” text box
error message.
14 15 Displays the detailed information of the selected error

11 “Details Info.” button
FRRB401013.ai message.
Displays the analysis flow of the selected error
n Procedures 12 “Analysis Flow” button
message.
You can keep a note about the selected error
(2) Click on [ERROR DB]. 13 “Memo.” text box message.
Up to seven memos may be entered.
→The “ERROR DB” window appears.
The name of the person (author) who entered text in
14 “Author” text box
(3) Click on [UPDATE], and update the error log. the “Memo.” text box is entered.
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key
and press the [SAVE] button again.
u NOTE u
*1: When the error log is to be completely cleared, do so after the main power switch of the
RU is turned OFF. If the log is cleared while the RU is working, the data carried in the RU
is again written into the FTP server when the RU power is subsequently turned OFF, and
the data cannot be cleared as a result.

MU-20
1.20 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs n Procedures
CAUTION
n Function
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings)
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into
of the RU, Console, and FTP server.
the Console are collectively uninstalled. You need not use the command when a single
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost.
machine is connected.
- For the RU connected to the Console, back up the following files. Those files must
be restored after installation.
Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP server
- CONFIGURATION
and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". In addition, the contents of “C:/
- HISTORY LOG
ProgramFiles/FujiFilm/FCR” directory on the Console are deleted.
- SCN ALL DATA
u NOTE u
If a plurality of RU’s of the same device type exist, the software and configuration data for the (1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console.
RU of the same type are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL. (2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed.
(3) Click on [UNINSTALL] on ALL RUs SETTING.
(4) Click on [OK].
(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST OF
EXISTING RU."

MU-21
1.21 VERSION UP: ALL RUs n Procedures
REFERENCE
n Function When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, update the connected RU’s one by one
in the sequence they are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". If two RU’s are registered
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into
in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in the sequence of ru2 and ru1, they are updated in this order.
the Console are collectively updated in version. You need not use the command when a
single machine is connected.
CAUTION (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
Never turn OFF the Console/RU power during the version updating. {MU:1.8_PING}
The contents of the FLASH ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot
up. (3) Repeat procedures (1) and (2) for all the RU's connected to the Console.
u NOTE u
When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, the RU software in the connected RU’s (5) Click on [VERSION UP] on ALL RUs SETTING.
is sequentially updated. Do not turn OFF the Console and RU power until the installation is (6) Click on [OK].
completed for all the RU's.
After the installation, be sure to check the software version of all of the RU's, and check to (7) Set the version update conditions, and click on [OK].
make sure that they have been updated in version.
→ The version update of the RU software starts.
(8) Click on [OK].

→ The version update starts.
(9) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.
(10) Click on [OK].

(11) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has changed.

MU-22
1.22 CDPath (2) Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the

n Function procedure (5).
The RU software should normally be installed from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
If a folder that completely copies the RU-APL CD-ROM data resides in the hard disk of the
Console, you may install the RU software from that hard disk without using the RU-APL CD-
ROM by specifying the path of that folder.
u NOTE u FRRB401015.ai
- To copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data, its whole data should be completely copied to a single
folder. If it is partially copied, the installation cannot be executed. l To enter the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, installation from proceed to the next procedure.
the RU-APL CD-ROM cannot be executed.
n Procedures for Setting "CDPath"

The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the "Copy CD-R" of the C drive are
described as an example. FRRB401016.ai
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The window for selecting the folder appears.
#1 (3) Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
"Configuration(C)"
#2
"CDPath(D) Ctrl+D"
FRRB401014.ai
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
FRRB401017.ai

MU-23
(4) Click on [OK]. n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
(2) Click on [CLEAR].

→ The path in the text box is cleared.
(3) Click on [SET].

→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
FRRB401018.ai
→ The path is displayed in the text box.
(5) Click on [SET].
FRRB401019.ai
→ “CDPath” is set.

MU-24
1.23 Initialize APL (5) Start the RU PC-TOOL.

CAUTION (7) Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu.
Never turn OFF the Console/RU power during the initialization. The contents of the
FLASH ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. (8) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console and click on [OK].
(9) Verify that the RU's IP address, which was selected in the procedure (6), is
n Function displayed, and then click on [OK].
Effects RU application initialization. → Initialization starts.
u NOTE u (10) Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key.
Effect RU application initialization only when no error code appears and the machine does
not boot up during troubleshooting.
n Procedures
(1) Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.
(2) Change the DIP switch (S7) settings on the CPU board.
- When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are not known: FRRB401020.ai
#1 Change the IP address of the Console to 172.16.1.20. Write down the IP address if a (11) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
site-specific value is used. (12) Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.
#2 Set the DIP switch-No.7 to ON.
(13) Restore the original setting for DIP switch on the CPU board.
REFERENCE
(14) Restore the machine.
When the machine is started with the DIP switch (S7)-No.7 set to ON, the IP address of
the RU is set to the default (172.16.1.10) only when initialized. (15) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU.
The IP address of the Console need be changed to 172.16.x.x accordingly.
(16) Turn ON the power of the RU.
- When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are known: The RU starts under the following conditions:
#1 Set the DIP switch-No. 8 to ON. - All LEDs light up.
- Initialization does not take place.
(3) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU.
(18) Delete the initialized RU.
The RU starts under the following conditions:
{MU:1.6_DELETE}
- All LEDs light up.
- Initialization does not take place. (19) Install the RU software.
{MU:1.11_INSTALL}

MU-25
2. Client PC l Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
Even when the Console is not running, it is possible to execute command by specifying the
RU's IP address. Executable commands are MUTL, PING, and MON.
2.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC

The client PC is a notebook PC on which CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. When CLIENT PC-
TOOL is installed on a notebook PC from the RU-APL CD-ROM, the notebook PC can be
used as the client PC.
2.1.1 Features of the Client PC

The use of CLIENT PC-TOOL, which is installed on the client PC, makes it possible to
execute commands as needed for RU maintenance even while the Console is used.
Note, however, the commands executable from RU PC-TOOL of the Console differ from
those executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
Commands executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL can be classified into the following three
categories:
- Commands for editing data stored in the client PC
- Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
l Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the Console
- Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the Console
Commands can be executed for an RU that is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-
CAUTION TOOL, which is installed on the client PC. This command execution is performed via the
Console (FTP server).
When executing a command for allowing CLIENT PC-TOOL to access the RU's FLASH
ROM, it is necessary to observe precautions as is the case with the use of RU PC-
TOOL. Refer to the following for details on the precautions.
{MU:2.1.3_Precautions for Using the Client PC}
Commands for editing data stored in the client PC

l
Data stored in the client PC can be edited and saved even when the client PC is not
connected to the network in the user's site.

MU-26
2.1.2 Operations of the Client PC
l Client PC operation immediately after installation l Client PC operation after hospital list creation
When you install and start CLIENT PC-TOOL, the following window opens. When an RU is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-TOOL, all commands of CLIENT
PC-TOOL can be executed. However, executable commands vary depending on whether
the client PC is in the "ON-LINE mode" or "OFF-LINE mode".
Hospital list
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
IP ADDRESS 172 16 1 10 VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY
MUTL PING MON FTP EDIT CONFIGURATION EDIT CL NAME
HOSPITAL I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB

FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.20
READ (MEDIA->CLIENT PC)
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )
ru1 ( 172.16.1.11 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 ) EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
WRITE (CLIENT PC->MEDIA)
EXECUTE
UPLORD (CLIENT PC->FTP SERVER->RU)
EXECUTE
DOWNLORD (RU->FTP SERVER->CLIENT PC)
EXECUTE
FRRB402004.ai
Refer to the following for the difference between the "ON-LINE mode" and "OFF-LINE mode"
and the details on commands executable in the respective modes.
The following commands can be executed immediately after installation: {MU:2.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- Commands selectable from the "Configuration (C)" menu
- Commands executable for a machine having an address that is entered in the IP address
field (MUTL, PING, and MON)

MU-27
2.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC 2.1.5 Precautions in Setting the Console
As is the case with RU PC-TOOL, CLIENT PC-TOOL has commands for accessing the RU's When the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be used in the ON-LINE mode, always check to make sure
FLASH ROM. When executing the commands for accessing the FLASH ROM, observe the that the “Windows Firewall” of the Console is set as follows.
following precautions: If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
- When executing a command for accessing the RU's FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the RU
or client PC power. If you turn OFF the power, the contents of the FLASH ROM become l Setting of the “Exceptions” tab of the Windows firewall
damaged so that the RU does not start up. The following two items must be checked in their boxes.
- While the Console and RU are used, do not execute a command that allows the client PC - FTP server
to access the FLASH ROM. - inetinfo
Refer to the following for the detailed procedures of checking the respective settings.
{MU:2.10_Checking the Console Setup when Using the Client PC}
2.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL, creating the hospital list,
and executing the version update command.
Before using a PC without a CD-ROM as the client PC, it is necessary to copy the contents
of the RU-APL CD-ROM to a certain place within the client PC.
When the CD path is set up after CLIENT PC-TOOL installation, it is possible to create the
hospital list and execute the version update command even when the RU-APL CD-ROM is
not on hand.

MU-28
2.2 Setting Up the Client PC 2.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM
This section describes the procedure for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on the notebook PC (1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the notebook PC.
with the RU-APL CD-ROM so that the notebook PC can be used as the client PC. → The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
n Items Required for Preparing the Client PC (2) Click on [INSTALL].

- Notebook PC for use as the client PC
(3) Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
- RU-APL CD-ROM
u NOTE u
n Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
Use either of the following two CLIENT PC-TOOL installation procedures: normally installed. If you accidentally select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], again
l Installing from the RU-APL CD-ROM take the procedures below for reinstallation.
Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically {MU:2.8_Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
opens. Start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL by clicking "INSTALL" in the "Set Up PC-TOOL"
window.
(4) Click on [NEXT].
Refer to the following for details on the installation procedure.
{MU:2.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM} (5) Click on [Install].
(6) Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.

l Installing on a PC without a CD-ROM drive
Install CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
flash memory or other recording medium.
Refer to the following for details on the installation procedure. 2.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive
{MU:2.2.2_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive}
(1) With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash
memory or other recording medium.
u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
(2) Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC.
(3) Copy all the data in the RU-APL CD-ROM copied in the procedure (1) into the
folder created in the procedure (2).
(4) Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
(5) Take the procedures from (2) to (6) in the following section, and install the CLIENT
PC-TOOL.
{MU:2.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}

MU-29
2.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL
This section describes the procedures for starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Two different procedures are used to start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Starting from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)

Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start CLIENT PC-TOOL from the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
Refer to the following for details on the procedure.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
l Starting from a client PC window

From a client PC window, start CLIENT PC-TOOL by specifying its file name.
Refer to the following for details on the procedure.

MU-30
2.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification (5) Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.
Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site and make the network settings of
the client PC. (6) Double-click "Local Area Connection," display the “Local Area Connection
Status” window, and click on [Property].
→ The “Local Area Connection Property” window appears.
(7) Choose "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click on [Properties].
(8) Set the client PC IP address and then click on [OK].
u NOTE u
- Ask the network manager of the user’s site to check the available IP address before
changing the IP address. If the IP address of another device is specified, the client PC
cannot be connected with the network.
- Set the subnet mask and the default gateway as the need arises, after the network
setups of the site are confirmed.
(1) Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site.
(9) Close the "Local Area Connection Properties" window, "Local Area Connection
(2) Make sure that the proxy server setting in “Internet Options” of the client PC is
“OFF”. Status" window, and "Network Connection" window.
{MU:2.11_Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC} (10) Enter the address of the RU or Console connected to the network in the user's
site, and then execute the "PING" command to verify that the client PC is
(3) Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
connected to the network in the user's site.
{MU:1.8_PING}
(4) Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:3.27_OnLine}

MU-31
2.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List 2.5.1 RU Registration
Create the hospital list in “CLIENT PC-TOOL”. The hospital list includes names of sites, FTP Refer to the following for the procedures of registering, deleting and copying the RU in the
servers used at the site, and the RU’s registered in a tree format. Upon registering a site, hospital list.
FTP server and RU in the hospital list, their folders are created in the C drive of the client PC. {MU:3.5_NEW RU}
With “CLIENT PC-TOOL”, the maintenance can be performed only for the RU registered in {MU:3.7_COPY}
the hospital list. {MU:3.6_DELETE}
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
RU1 RU2 FTP1 RU3
172.016.001.021
RU4 FTP1
172.016.001.022
Register, in the hospital list,

the RU's subject to the maintenance.
Hospital list
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5

FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.20
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )
ru1 ( 172.16.1.11 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 ) EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
FRRB402009.ai
u NOTE u
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for preparing/editing the hospital list. Therefore, have the
RU-APL CD-ROM on hand before you start performing the procedure.
If you create or edit the hospital list with a PC without a CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to
copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a certain location within the client PC and set the CD-
path. Refer to the following for the procedures of setting the CD-Path.
{MU:3.24_CDPath}

MU-32
2.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE l OFF-LINE mode
2.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

By setting the IP address of the client PC, the PC can be connected with the network in the "OnLine" is unchecked.
user’s site. The client PC has commands to be executed while connected with the network
of the site (ON-LINE mode) and commands to be executed while separated from the network
of the site (OFF-LINE mode). The available commands differ depending on the mode of the FRRB402012.ai
client PC, so that it is necessary to change over the mode of the client PC depending on the The following commands are available when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
type of the maintenance. The client PC can be changed over between the ON-LINE and - Commands to register the RU where the maintenance will take place
OFF-LINE modes through the use of the “OnLine” command of CLIENT PC-TOOL. - Commands to edit the machine information of the RU acquired during the ON-LINE mode
{MU:3.27_OnLine}
l ON-LINE mode
"OnLine" is checked.
Refer to the following for details on operations in the OFF-LINE mode.

FRRB402010.ai {MU:2.6.3_Operation in OFF-LINE Mode}
When the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode, the following commands are available.
- Commands to acquire/write machine information of the RU
- Commands to access the FLASH ROM of the RU and the FTP server
- Command to directly operate the RU (MUTL)
When a command to access the FLASH ROM of the RU is executed, “PC” flashes on the
operation panel of the RU as in the case of the RU PC-TOOL of the Console.
Refer to the following for details on operations in the ON-LINE mode.

{MU:2.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode}

MU-33
2.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the ON-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference

REFERENCE
Acquires the software version of the
The “ON-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when only the commands to
GET VERSION RU stored in the FTP server, and {MU:3.9_GET VERSION}
access the RU or the FTP server from CLIENT PC-TOOL are available. To change over the displays it in the hospital list.
client PC to the ON-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Starts up the MUTL of the RU service
Refer to the following for details of procedures for changing over to the ON-LINE mode. MUTL {MU:3.10_MUTL}
utility.
{MU:3.27_OnLine}
Executes PING for the RU or the FTP
PING {MU:3.11_PING}
During the ON-LINE mode, the commands to directly access the FLASH ROM of the RU or server.
the FTP server, such as VERSION UP, UPLOAD of RU’s CONFIGURATION information are Displays the change of I/O statues of
MON {MU:3.12_MON}
executed. the RU.
Checks the network connection with
FTP the RU and the operation of the FTP {MU:3.13_FTP}
server.
Updates the version of the RU
VERSION UP {MU:3.14_VERSION UP}
software.
Copies the maintenance information
UPLOAD edited in the OFF-LINE mode to the {MU:3.22_UPLOAD}
RU and the FTP server.
Copies the maintenance information of
DOWNLOAD the RU stored in the FLASH ROM of {MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
the RU and in the FTP to the client PC.
REFERENCE
The commands available during the ON-LINE mode include those for accessing only the
FLASH ROM of the RU and those for accessing both the FLASH ROM of the RU and the
FTP server.
The commands for accessing both the FLASH ROM of the RU and the FTP server include:
- GET VERSION
- FTP
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
- DOWNLOAD

MU-34
2.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the OFF-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference

REFERENCE
The “OFF-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when the commands to Registers an RU in the hospital
NEW RU {MU:3.5_NEW RU}
access the RU or the FTP server from the CLIENT PC-TOOL are not available. To change list.
over the client PC to the OFF-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC- Deletes an RU registered in
DELETE {MU:3.6_DELETE}
TOOL. the hospital list.
Refer to the following for details of procedures for changing over to the OFF-LINE mode.
Duplicates an RU registered in
{MU:3.27_OnLine} COPY {MU:3.7_COPY}
the hospital list.
During the OFF-LINE mode, you can edit the CONFIGURATION information, HISTORY Changes the name of an RU
RENAME {MU:3.8_RENAME}
information or the like registered the hospital list. registered in the hospital list.
u NOTE u Edits the HISTORY information

EDIT HISTORY of the RU stored in the client {MU:3.15_EDIT HISTORY}
The data you can edit in the OFF-LINE mode is limited to the information stored in the client PC.
PC. To effect the contents edited in the client PC in the RU machine, the data need be
uploaded after the client PC is changed over to the ON-LINE mode. Refer to the following Edits the CONFIGURATION
for details of the operation in the ON-LINE mode. EDIT COFIGURATION information of the RU stored in {MU:3.16_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
the client PC.
{MU:2.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode}
Edits the list of the master
CL’s of the image transfer
EDIT CL NAME {MU:3.17_EDIT CL NAME}
destination stored in the client
PC.
Displays trace data of RU I/O
I/O TRACE EXPERT {MU:3.18_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
in the form of a timing chart.
Displays error log data of an
ERROR DB {MU:3.19_ERROR DB}
RU.
Reads the machine information
READ from a recording medium such {MU:3.20_READ}
as an FD to the client PC.
Writes the machine information
from the client PC into a
WRITE {MU:3.21_WRITE}
recording medium such as an
FD.
Copies the information in the
Export hospital list from the client PC {MU:3.25_Export}
to a recording medium.
Copies the information in the
Import hospital list from a recording {MU:3.26_Import}
medium to the client PC.

MU-35
2.7 Data Flow of Each Command 2.7.2 READ and WRITE
Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Features of the commands of UPLOAD & DOWNLOAD, READ & WRITE, and Import &
READ: Writes the machine information resident in the client PC into an external recording
Export and the data flow are described below.
medium.
WRITE: Writes the machine information stored in an external recording medium into the client
2.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD PC.
Available only when the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode.
DOWNLOAD: Acquires the machine information from the FLASH ROM of the RU.
UPLOAD: Writes the machine information edited by the client PC into the FLASH ROM
of the RU. “PC” flashes on the operation panel of the RU during the write.
2.7.3 Import and Export

Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Import: Reads hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
in an external recording medium into the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Export: Writes hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
in the CLIENT PC-TOOL into an external recording medium.

MU-36
2.8 Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after Improper
CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation
If “For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed,
follow the procedures below to reinstall the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Two ways are available as countermeasures to be taken when a mistake is made during the
installation of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Discontinue the installation, and re-install

“For FTP-Server” has been inadvertently selected when CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
If the mistake in selection is noticed during the operation, you can discontinue the installation.
{MU:2.8.1_Solution -1}
l Delete the RU PC-TOOL, and re-install

“For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
The RU PC-TOOL is installed if the installation is continued. Delete the RU PC-TOOL by the
RU-APL CD-ROM, and re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:2.8.2_Solution-2}

MU-37
2.8.1 Solution-1 2.8.2 Solution-2
(1) If you select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], click on [Cancel] in the (1) Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up.
subsequently displayed window.
(2) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the notebook PC.
→ The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
(3) Click on [UNINSTALL].

"For FTP-Server" is
inadvertently selected
(5) Click on [Remove].
(6) Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.

(7) Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to the following procedures.
{MU:2.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
[Click]
FRRB402018.ai
(2) Click on [Yes] to confirm the cancellation of the installation.
(3) Click on [Finish].
(4) Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to the following procedures.

{MU:2.2_Setting Up the Client PC}

MU-38
2.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL
This section describes the version update procedures for CLIENT PC-TOOL.
To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, use either of the following procedures:
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM

Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. From this window, uninstall CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform an install again to
update CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Refer to the following for the procedures of updating the version.
{MU:2.9.1_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive

Update CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a
flash memory or other recording medium.
Refer to the following for the procedures of updating the version.
{MU:2.9.2_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive}

MU-39
2.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM 2.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive
(1) Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up. (1) With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash
memory or other recording medium.
(2) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Client PC.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
(2) Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC.
(3) Copy all the data in the RU-APL CD-ROM copied in the procedure (1) into the
(5) Click on [Remove]. folder created in the procedure (2).
(6) Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. (4) Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
(7) Click on [INSTALL]. (5) Take the procedures from (3) to (11).
(8) Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET]. {MU:2.9.1_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}
u NOTE u
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to the following procedures.
{MU:2.8_Corrective Procedure to Be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
(10) Click on [Install].

→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.

MU-40
2.10 Checking the Console Setup when Using the Client PC (3) Verify the settings of the “FTP” port.
#1 Select “FTP_port” in the “To enable an exception select its check box:” column, and
Be sure to check the settings in the “Windows Firewall” on the Console before using the click on [Properties].
CLIENT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode.
If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available. #2 Make sure that the following settings are made.
(1) Check the UAC settings. - Name: FTP_port
- Port No.: 21
REFERENCE - Protocol: TCP
The settings are applicable only to the Windows Vista. (4) Close the respective windows.
#1 Click on [User Accounts] on the control panel.

#2 Click on [Turn User Account Control on or off].
#3 Make sure that the “Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer”
box is unchecked.
(2) Check the settings for the Windows firewall.

#1 Click on [Windows Firewall] on the control panel.
#2 Click on “Allow a program through Windows Firewall”.
→ The “Exceptions” window of the “Windows Firewall Settings” window appears.
#3 Make sure that “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” are displayed in the “To enable an
exception select its check box:” column and that their boxes are checked.
If they are not checked, check them. If “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” are not displayed,
click on [Add program...] button and add “FTP Server” and “inetinfo”. Upon
completion of the addition, make sure that their boxes are checked.
REFERENCE
The “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” paths are as follows:
C:\Windows\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe
C:\Windows\SYSTEM32\inetsrv\inetinfo.exe

MU-41
2.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC
If the proxy server setting is “ON” in the “Internet Options” of the notebook PC used as the
client PC, commands cannot be correctly executed for the RU, resulting in errors.
Be sure to set the “Proxy server” to “OFF” in the notebook PC used, before servicing.
(1) Open the "Control Panel" in the Windows [Start] menu.
(2) Open the "Internet Options"
(3) Click on the “Connections” tab, and click on “LAN Settings” button.
→ The “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window opens.
(4) Make sure that a check mark is not put in the check box for the “Proxy server”
setting. If checked, cancel it.
[Verify]
No check mark is put.
FRRB402020.ai
(5) Close the respective windows.

MU-42
3. CLIENT PC-TOOL 3.1.2 Tree Diagram

CLIENT PC-TOOL
3.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree HOSPITAL
The CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed into a notebook PC of a service engineer to serve as {MU:3.5_NEW RU}
a maintenance tool for use of service engineers. It is used to update the RU software {MU:3.10_MUTL}
{MU:3.6_DELETE}
in version and check the connection between the Console and the RU on the client PC
{MU:3.11_PING}
networked with the RU. {MU:3.7_COPY}
{MU:3.12_MON}
3.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:3.8_RENAME}
{MU:3.13_FTP}
{MU:3.9_GET VERSION}
{MU:3.14_VERSION UP}
{MU:3.15_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:3.19_ERROR DB}
{MU:3.20_READ}
{MU:3.21_WRITE}
{MU:3.22_UPLOAD}
{MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
Configuration
{MU:3.24_CDPath}
{MU:3.25_Export}
{MU:3.26_Import}
{MU:3.27_OnLine}
{MU:3.28_Network}

MU-43
3.2 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL n Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL
(1) Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of CLIENT PC-TOOL.
n Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL) (2) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens.

→ CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up.
u NOTE u
If your click of [START] opens the following window without starting CLIENT PC-TOOL,
the version of CLIENT PC-TOOL stored on the RU-APL CD-ROM is later than the
version of CLIENT PC-TOOL installed on the client PC.
3.3 Maintenance Mode
Refer to the following for the maintenance mode.
{MU:1.3_Maintenance Mode}

FRRB403002.ai
- Click on [BACK] when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be updated in version, and take the
following procedures for updating the version of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:2.9_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL}
- If you do not intend to update CLIENT PC-TOOL on the spot, click on [CONTINUE].
n Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window

(1) Choose "Run..." from Windows' Start menu.
→ The "Run" window opens.
(2) Enter "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" and then

click on [OK].
→ CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up.

MU-44
3.4 Hospital List 3.5 NEW RU
The hospital list contains the name of each site, the FTP server used there, and the RU’s Used to register the name of a site, the FTP server used there and the RU in the hospital list
registered in a tree form. When the site, FTP server and RU are registered in the hospital in the tree form. Folders for storing the respective data are created in the C drive of the client
list, their respective folders are created in the C drive of the client PC. PC according to the tree constructed in the hospital list.
n Procedures
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5
(1) Right-click "HOSPITAL". From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].

FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.20
REFERENCE
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )
ru1 ( 172.16.1.11 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.21
ru2 ( 172.16.1.12 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 ) EXECUTE
ru3 ( 172.16.1.13 , CR-IR356 , 1.7 )
EXECUTE
Right-click the “site name” when the FTP server or the RU is to be registered in the site
EXECUTE
name you have registered.
EXECUTE
FRRB403003.ai Right-click the “FTP server name” when the RU is to be registered in the FTP server
Refer to the following for the detailed procedures of registering in the hospital list. you have registered.
{MU:3.5_NEW RU}
(2) Enter a new site name in the "HOSPITAL NAME" field and then click on [SET].
(3) In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at
the site, and then click on [SET].
REFERENCE
If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in the
procedure (4). In this instance, skip to the procedure (5).
(4) Click on [OK].

(5) Set the installation conditions, and click on [OK].
(6) Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
→ The added contents are displayed in the hospital list.

MU-45
3.6 DELETE 3.7 COPY
Used to delete the site, FTP server or RU registered in the hospital list. The folders of the Used to copy the RU registered in the hospital list. The folder of the selected RU is copied in
site, FTP server or the RU deleted from the tree are deleted from the C drive of the client PC. the C drive of the client PC.
n Procedures u NOTE u
The "COPY" command works only when the RU to be added has the same model number
(1) Right-click the item to be deleted from the hospital list, and select [DELETE] from
as an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, use the "NEW RU"
the displayed menu.
command.
(2) Click on [OK].
→ The selected item is deleted. n Procedures
(1) Select [COPY] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be
copied in the hospital list.
(2) Enter a new site name in the “HOSPITAL NAME” field, and click on [SET]. Or
select an existing site name from the pull-down menu, and click on [SET].
(3) Enter the IP address of the FTP server being used at the site in the “FTP-SERV.
IP ADDR” field, and click on [SET]. Or select an IP address from the pull-down
menu, and click on [SET].
(4) Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
→ The copied RU is added to the hospital list.

MU-46
3.8 RENAME 3.9 GET VERSION
Used to change the name of the RU registered in the hospital list. Used to identify the version of the RU software of the RU registered in the hospital list by
accessing the FTP server from the client PC while connected with the network in the site.
n Procedures The identified version of the RU software is displayed in the hospital list.
(1) Select [RENAME] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be
u NOTE u
renamed in the hospital list.
This command is available when the client PC is connected with the network in the site and
(2) Input the name of the RU to be changed, and click on [SET]. the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
→ The RU name is changed.
n Procedures
(1) Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
{MU:2.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
(2) Select [GET VERSION] from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the RU
whose software version is to be identified in the hospital list.
→ The RU software version number then appears.

MU-47
3.10 MUTL 3.11 PING
Used to start up the MUTL of the RU service utility. The MUTL serves to diagnose and adjust Executes the PING command for the RU or the FTP server selected in the hospital list.
the RU, such as board checks and mechanical checks. Although the same commands as Clicking on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears, where you can check whether
those of the Console appear when the MUTL is started up from the client PC, some of them the network connection from the client PC to the RU or the FTP server is normal.
cannot be executed.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u This command is available when the client PC is connected with the network in the site and
This command is available when the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
n Procedures
n Procedures (1) Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
(1) Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:2.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
(2) Select the RU or FTP server in the hospital list.
(2) Select the RU in the hospital list.
(3) Click on [PING].
(3) Click on [MUTL]. → The “command prompt” window appears.
n Details of Items (4) Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
Refer to the following for details on the functions and the procedures for the MUTL #2
commands.
{MU:4_MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions} #1
FRRB403004.ai
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |

Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).

MU-48
3.12 MON
n Function
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes
its status. No ON/OFF indication appears for the motor.
u NOTE u
n Procedures
(3) Click on [MON].

→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears.

→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
has changed.
REFERENCE
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However,
the items displayed within the monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to
resume the monitor function.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.
n Details of Items
Refer to the following for the items and I/O names appearing on the window.
{MU:1.9_MON}

MU-49
3.13 FTP (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
#1
n Function
Used to check the network with the RU selected in the hospital list, and verify that the FTP
server in the Console is operating. #2
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the Console are normal.
u NOTE u FRRB403005.ai
l GOOD indication
“value=0=0x0” should be displayed.
l NO GOOD indication
n Procedures
(5) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
(2) Select the RU in the hospital list. #2
(3) Click on [FTP]. #1

→ Two windows appear.
FRRB403006.ai
l [GOOD indication]
"Transfer complete" appears.


MU-50
3.14 VERSION UP REFERENCE
The “CLIENT PC-TOOL installation” takes place in the procedure (10).
CAUTION (10) Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.

Never turn OFF the RU or the client PC during version-update. Otherwise, the {MU:2.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, resulting in the RU unable to boot up. (11) Click on [START], and start up the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
(12) Select the RU to be updated in version from the hospital list.

n Function (13) Use the [FTP] command to check the connection of the machine.
Used to execute RU software version updates.
{MU:3.13_FTP}
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
This command is available when the client PC is connected with the network in the site and The “Version-update of the RU software” takes place in the procedures (14) to (21).
(14) Select the RU to be updated in version from the hospital list.
REFERENCE
(15) Click on [VERSION UP].
The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize
the device type of the RU. CLIENT PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches → The confirmation window appears.
mounted on the CPU board of the RU to identify the type.
(16) Click on [OK].
n Procedures
(1) Turn ON the client PC. (17) Set the installation conditions, and click on [OK].
(2) Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. → Installation starts.
{MU:2.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} (18) Confirm the version, and click on [OK].
(3) Turn ON the power of the Console. (19) Set “CONFIGURATION”, and click on [SET].
(4) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. {MU:1.14_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
REFERENCE (20) Check that the installation is completed, and press the [Enter] key.
The “CLIENT PC-TOOL uninstallation” takes place in the procedures (5) to (9).
(21) Click on [OK].
(5) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the client PC's CD-ROM drive. → The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
(9) Upon completion of uninstallation, click on [Finish].

MU-51
3.15 EDIT HISTORY 3.16 EDIT CONFIGURATION
Used to view the HISTORY information (such as the number of IP’s processed by the RU Used to set the CONFIGURATION information for the RU stored in the C drive of the client
and lighting time of the erasure lamp) of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC. The PC.
information can be reset when units are replaced. The following four kinds of information are
displayed and may be edited. n Procedures
- USE
u NOTE u
- IP
- LASER The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the
- LAMP information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT
n Procedures PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the CONFIGURATION information.
{MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HISTORY] is the information (1) Select the RU in the hospital list.
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL (2) Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the HISTORY information. → The "EDIT CONFIGURATION" window appears.
{MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
(3) Check or change the contents displayed on the screen.
(1) Select the RU in the hospital list. REFERENCE
(2) Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. Refer to the following for details of each item.
→ The "EDIT HISTORY" window appears.
(3) Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. (4) Click on [SET].
REFERENCE u NOTE u
Refer to the following for details of each item. To write the specified information in the FLASH ROM of the RU, upload the
{MU:1.13_EDIT HISTORY} CONFIGURATION information while the client PC is connected with the network in the
site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
(4) Click on [SET]. {MU:3.22_UPLOAD}
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the FLASH ROM of the RU, upload the HISTORY
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:3.22_UPLOAD}

MU-52
3.17 EDIT CL NAME n Procedures for Editing/Adding the Console as Image Transfer Destination
u NOTE u
n Function The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
Used to edit/add the Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
CL's. connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the CONFIGURATION information.
{MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
(2) Click on [EDIT CL NAME].
(3) Click on [MODIFY] to edit, or [NEW] to add.

→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the FLASH ROM of the RU, upload the
CONFIGURATION information while the client PC is connected with the network in the
site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:3.22_UPLOAD}
(4) Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET].
n Procedures for Setting the Master CL

(1) Select the CL to be set as the master CL from those appearing on the “CL NAME”
window.
(2) Click on [>>] button, and click on [SET].


MU-53
3.18 I/O TRACE EXPERT 3.19 ERROR DB
Used to view the I/O trace data of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC in the form of Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of
a timing chart. Note that, however, only the I/O trace data can be displayed. the RU, stored in the C drive of the client PC.
n Procedures n Procedures
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE
PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information. mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the ERROR LOG information.
{MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD} {MU:3.23_DOWNLOAD}
(1) Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. (1) Select the RU in the hospital list.
{MU:2.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
(2) Click on [ERROR DB].
(2) Select the RU in the hospital list. → The "ERROR-DB" window appears. The error log data stored in the client PC is
(3) Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT]. displayed.
→ The "I/O TRACE EXPERT" window appears, and the trace data stored in the client
n Details of Items
PC is displayed.
Refer to the following for the items appearing on the “ERROR DB” window and detailed
functions.
n Details of Items
{MU:1.19_ERROR DB}
Refer to the following for the items appearing on the “I/O TRACE EXPERT” window and
detailed functions.

MU-54
3.20 READ
n Function
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information and machine-specific data from a recording
medium such as an FD to the C drive of the client PC. The items which can be copied by
means of the READ command include:
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data.
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time).
l "SCN ALL DATA"

Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.

Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data.

Copies optical data of the scanner data.
n Procedures
(2) Select the items to be read from the pull-down menu of “READ”.
(3) Click on [EXECUTE].
(4) Select the data location to be read, and click on [OK].

(5) Verify the location to be read, and click on [OK].
(6) Click on [OK].

MU-55
3.21 WRITE n Procedures
n Function (2) Select the items to be written from the pull-down menu of “WRITE”.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information and machine-specific data from the C drive
of the client PC to a recording medium such as an FD. The items which can be copied by (3) Click on [EXECUTE].
means of the WRITE command include: (4) Select the data location to be written, and click on [OK].
l "ERROR LOG" (5) Verify the location to be written, and click on [OK].
Copies the error log data.
→ The data is stored in the location specified in the procedure (2).
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data. (6) Click on [OK].
l "TRACE LOGS"
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information).
l "HISTORY LOG"
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"




MU-56
3.22 UPLOAD n Procedures
CAUTION
n Function
The LED panel of the RU lights up while the FLASH ROM of the RU is being updated.
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information and machine-specific data from the C drive
Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
of the client PC to the FLASH ROM of the RU. The items which can be uploaded include:
If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the FLASH ROM are corrupted, and the
l "CONFIGURATION" RU will no longer boot up.
Copies the configuration data.
(1) Check that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is ON-LINE.
l "HISTORY LOG" {MU:2.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time. (3) Select the item to be uploaded from the pull-down menu of “UPLOAD”.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" (4) Click on [EXECUTE].

Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. → UPLOAD starts.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" (5) Click on [OK].
REFERENCE
The contents copied in the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the main power
switch of the RU and again turning it ON.
u NOTE u
the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and
make network settings before taking the procedures.

MU-57
3.23 DOWNLOAD n Procedures
(1) Check that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is ON-LINE.
n Function {MU:2.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
Used to copy the CONFIGURATION information, error log data or the like from the FLASH (2) Select the RU in the hospital list.
ROM of the RU to the client PC. The items which can be downloaded include:
(3) Select the item to be downloaded from the pull-down menu of “DOWNLOAD”.
l "ERROR LOG"
Copies the error log data. (4) Click on [EXECUTE].
→ DOWNLOAD starts.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data. (5) Click on [OK].
l "TRACE LOGS" REFERENCE
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information). Change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the OFF-LINE mode to execute respective
commands, when the downloaded information is to be edited or viewed. Refer to the
l "HISTORY LOG"
following for the detailed procedures of changing over to the OFF-LINE mode.
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"



u NOTE u
the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and
make network settings before taking the procedures.

MU-58
3.24 CDPath 3.25 Export
When an RU is to be registered in the hospital list or the RU software is to be updated in Used to copy the tree information registered in the hospital list, and folders of the site, FTP
version, the necessary data is usually acquired from the RU-APL CD-ROM. If a folder in server and RU stored in the C drive of the client PC to the hard disk of the client PC or to an
which the complete RU-APL CD-ROM data is copied is present on the hard disk of the client external recording medium.
PC, you can acquire the necessary data from the hard disk without the RU-APL CD-ROM by
u NOTE u
specifying the folder path.
- The data to be copied by means of [Export] is too large to be stored in a recording medium
u NOTE u with a small recording capacity such as an FD. Specify the hard disk with a sufficient
- Completely copy all of the data into a single folder when the RU-APL CD-ROM data is to be empty space or a recording medium with a large capacity as the destination of the data to
copied. You cannot register an RU in the hospital list or update the RU software in version be copied.
with a folder containing a partial copy of the data. - Upon execution of [Export], a “SERV” folder is created in the specified storage region. Do
- Set the “CDPath” only when necessary. If the “CDPath” is set, you cannot register an RU not change the folder name and the stored contents of the created “SERV” folder.
in the hospital list or version-update the RU software from the RU-APL CD-ROM even if the
CD-ROM is inserted into the client PC. Cancel the setting when not necessary.
n Procedures
(1) Select “Export” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
n Procedures
→ The “EXPORT” window appears.
Refer to the following for the procedures.
{MU:1.22_CDPath} (2) Select the data location to be exported, and click on [OK].
(3) Verify the location to be exported, and click on [OK].
→ The data is stored in the location specified in the procedure (2).

MU-59
3.26 Import 3.27 OnLine
Used to read the data stored by means of [Export], display the data in the tree of the hospital Used to change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
list, and store it in the C drive of the client PC. The available commands differ between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
u NOTE u l ON-LINE mode
If data with the site name same as that registered in the hospital list is to be read, the A check mark appears at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
following error message appears and [Import] is interrupted.
To read the data having the site name same as that registered in the hospital list, delete the l OFF-LINE mode
site having the same name registered in the hospital list, before re-trying [Import]. A check mark does not appear at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
Refer to the following for details of the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes.
n Procedures
(1) Select “OnLine” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ A check mark disappears from the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu,
FRRB403008.ai setting the CLIENT PC-TOOL in the OFF-LINE mode.
n Procedures
(1) Select “Import” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “IMPORT” window appears.
(2) Select the data location to be imported, and click on [OK].

(3) Verify the location to be imported, and click on [OK].
→ The imported contents are reflected in the hospital list.

MU-60
3.28 Network
n Function
Upon executing the “Network” command, the “Network Connection” window of Windows
appears. This command is used to connect the client PC with the network at the user’s site
and make the network settings.
n Procedures
(1) Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.

MU-61
4. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions A1
The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated by starting up the {MU:4.3[2]_Conveyance Check}
MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL on the Console or from the CLIENT PC-TOOL on the client PC.
{MU:4.3[2-1]_Conveyance Setting}
CAUTION {MU:4.3[2-2]_Processing Mode Setting}
The RU cannot read normally after the MUTL (maintenance utility) is used. Be sure to
{MU:4.3[2-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting}
turn OFF the main power switch of the RU and again turn it ON upon completion of the
MUTL operation.
{MU:4.3[3]_Board Check}
{MU:4.3[3-1]_CPU Board Setting Display}

4.1 Tree of MUTL
{MU:4.3[3-2]_Panel Check}
MUTL
{MU:4.3[3-2-1]_PANEL LED On/Off}
{MU:4.3[1]_Network Address} {MU:4.3[3-2-2]_BUZZER On/Off}

{MU:4.3[1-1]_RU IP Address}
{MU:4.3[4]_Software Check}
0 {MU:4.3[1-1-1]_RU IP Address}
{MU:4.3[4-1]_Ver. Display}
{MU:4.3[1-2]_RU Subnet Mask}
{MU:4.3[4-2]_MAC Address Display}
0 {MU:4.3[1-2-1]_RU Subnet Mask}
{MU:4.3[5]_Virtual Image Check}
{MU:4.3[1-3]_RU Default GateWay}
{MU:4.3[5-1]_LED Virtual Read}
0 {MU:4.3[1-3-1]_RU Default GateWay}
{MU:4.3[5-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
{MU:4.3[1-4]_FTP IP Address}
A2
0 {MU:4.3[1-4-1]_FTP IP Address}
{MU:4.3[1-5]_RU Securety IP Address}
0 {MU:4.3[1-5-1]_RU Securety IP Address}
{MU:4.3[1-6]_RU Securety Net Address}
{MU:4.3[1-6-1]_RU Securety Net Address}
{MU:4.3[1-7]_UPDATE}
A1

MU-62
A2 A3 B1
{MU:4.3[6-5]_Correction}
{MU:4.3[6]_Scanner Check}
{MU:4.3[6-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
{MU:4.3[6-1]_Polygon Motor}
{MU:4.3[6-2]_Laser} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-1-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
{MU:4.3[6-3]_HV Diagnostic} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-1-2]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (HR)}
{MU:4.3[6-3-1]_HV Setting/Diagnostic} {MU:4.3[6-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction}
{MU:4.3[6-4]_Format Adjustment} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-2-1]_HR}
{MU:4.3[6-4-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-2-2]_ST (GR)}
{MU:4.3[6-4-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)} {MU:4.3[6-5-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
{MU:4.3[6-4-3]_Manual Adjustment (Line} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-3-1]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-3-1]_18 x 24HR-VI} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-3-2]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-3-2]_24 x 30HR-VI} {MU:4.3[6-5-4]_Special Sensitivity Correction}
{MU:4.3[6-4-4]_Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel)} {MU:4.3[6-5-5]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-1]_10 x 12 inch} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-5-1]_Existing S-Value}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-2]_08 x 10 inch} 0 {MU:4.3[6-5-5-2]_Expected S-Value}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-3]_24 x 30 cm} {MU:4.3[6-6]_Trouble Shooting}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-4]_18 x 24 cm} {MU:4.3[6-6-1]_Shading Correction}
{MU:4.3[6-7]_HV ON/OFF}
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-5]_15 x 30cm}
A4 B2
0 {MU:4.3[6-4-4-6]_30 x 24cm}
{MU:4.3[6-4-5]_Default Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:4.3[6-4-6]_Default Setting (Pixel)}
{MU:4.3[6-4-7]_Optic Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:4.3[6-4-8]_Optic Setting (Pixel)}
A3 B1

MU-63
A4 B2
{MU:4.3[6-8]_S Value}
{MU:4.3[6-8-1]_S Value Now}
{MU:4.3[6-8-2]_S Value Calculate}
{MU:4.3[6-8-3]_PMT/Light Guide Change}
0 {MU:4.3[6-8-3-1]_LED Initialize}
{MU:4.3[7]_For Design}

MU-64
4.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL  Starting Up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL
The MUTL is started by the following two ways: CAUTION

- To start from the RU PC-TOOL of the Console
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
- To start from the CLIENT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
Start up the MUTL by either method depending on the conditions of a user’s site for
operation. (1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
u NOTE u
(2) From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select an RU where "MUTL" is to be started.
Some commands for virtual image check and scanner check require images to be read and
output on the Console.
Since images cannot be read or output on the client PC, always start up the MUTL from the
RU PC-TOOL of the Console to check the virtual images and the scanner.
REFERENCE
The MUTL has the same menu items to appear either started from the RU PC-TOOL of the (3) Click on [MUTL].
Console or from the CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC. → The “MUTL” window appears, and indication on the operation panel changes from
“onL” to “PC” flashing.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB404002.ai
REFERENCE
Refer to the following for canceling the RU maintenance mode.

MU-65
 Starting Up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL  Exiting the MUTL
CAUTION u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to restart the machine upon completion of the MUTL operation. Turn OFF the main
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
power switch. Otherwise, such problems may occur that the settings will not be reflected or
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
conveyance cannot normally take place.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the operation that was performed in the MUTL has been completed
(2) Select the RU in the hospital list. before exiting the MUTL.
If the operation that was performed in the MUTL is under way, the operation running on the
RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited by clicking on .
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5
VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY

(1) Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
IP ADDRESS 172 16 1 10
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.20
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )
EXECUTE

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
FRRB404003.ai
(3) Click on [MUTL].

→ The “MUTL” window appears, and indication on the operation panel changes from
“onL” to “PC” flashing.
RU PC-TOOL Ver.1.5

FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
FTP SERV. : 172.16.1.20
ru0 ( 172.16.1.10 , CR-IR355 , 1.7 )
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
FRRB404004.ai
REFERENCE
Refer to the following for canceling the RU maintenance mode.

MU-66
4.3 Details of MUTL  Exiting Procedures
(1) Exit the MUTL.
[1] Network Address (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

 Function/Purpose
The network addresses are set. The addresses that can be set and their default values are
as follows:
Layer 1 Layer 2 Command name Default value
[1-1] [1-1-1] RU IP Address 172.16.1.10
[1-2] [1-2-1] RU subnet Mask 255.255.0.0
[1-3] [1-3-1] RU Default GateWay 172.16.1.0
[1-4] [1-4-1] FTP IP Address 172.16.1.20
[1-5] [1-5-1] RU Securety IP Address 0.0.0.0
[1-6] [1-6-1] RU Securety Net Address 0.0.0.0
[1-7] - UPDATE -
 Procedures
REFERENCE
The following description is made by an example of procedures only for “setting the IP
address”. When two or more settings are to be made, repeat the procedures (1) and (2), and
carry out [UPDATE] once at the end.
(1) Input the IP address in “[1-1-1] RU IP Address”.
(2) [SET]
→ “OK” appears.
(3) Click on [CANCEL] to go up to an upper layer of the menu.
(4) [UPDATE]
→ “OK” appears.

MU-67
[2] Conveyance Check  Exiting Procedures
(1) Return “[2-1] Conveyance Setting” to “ROUTINE”.
 Function/Purpose (2) Return “[2-2] Processing Mode Setting” to “READ”.
The automatic IP conveyance (unattended conveyance) is set/canceled.
(3) [SET]
 Procedures (4) Exit the MUTL.
(1) Select the conveyance mode in “[2-1] Conveyance Setting”.
- AUTO MODE: Automatic conveyance mode
- ROUTINE: Normal conveyance mode (6) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.
(2) Select the processing mode in “[2-2] Processing Mode Setting”.
- READ: Normal read
 Procedures for Stopping the Automatic Conveyance
- 1-ERASE: Erasure mode (1) Select “ROUTINE” in “[2-1] Conveyance Setting”.
- 2-ERASE: Cannot be selected in the machine
(2) Set the conveyance count to 0 in “[2-3] Number of Conveyance Setting”.
(3) Set the conveyance count (1 to 99999) in “[2-3] Number of Conveyance Setting”.
(4) [SET]
(5) Cancel the RU maintenance mode.

(6) Insert the cassette.
→ Automatic conveyance starts, and the conveyance count is displayed on the
operation panel.

MU-68
[3] Board Check  Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table
Hexadecimal Binary
0 0000
[3-1] CPU Board Setting Display 1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
 Function/Purpose 4 0100
The settings of the S7 DIP switches on the CPU board are displayed. 5 0101
6 0110
The settings of the DIP switches are shown in two-digit hexadecimal numbers. You can know
7 0111
the settings of the DIP switches by converting the number into an eight-digit binary number.
8 1000
REFERENCE 9 1001
Although a four-digit number appears, the two lower digits show the setting. A 1010
B 1011
C 1100
 How to Read the Indication D 1101
E 1110
Example: Indication of “0x24” F 1111
(1) View the indication on the screen.
(2) Convert the hexadecimal number into a binary number.  Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches
→ Hexadecimal “2” means binary “0010”, hexadecimal “4” means binary “0100”, and the The first digit of the binary number corresponds to the first DIP switch.
setting is “0010 0100”.
{n Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table}
(3) See the DIP switch settings from the binary number obtained in the procedure (2).
→ As the third and sixth digits of the binary number are 1 and the others are 0, the third
and sixth DIP switches are ON and the others are OFF.
{n Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches}
 Exiting Procedures
(1) Exit the MUTL.
 Details of the DIP Switch Settings

{MC:4.6_CPU Board}

MU-69
[3-2] Panel Check [3-2-2] BUZZER On/Off
[3-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off  Function/Purpose

The buzzer is caused to sound.
 Function/Purpose  Procedures
All LEDs on the operation panel are lit or unlit. (1) Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function.
 Procedures - ON: The buzzer sounds.

- OFF: The buzzer stops sounding.
(1) Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function.
- ON: All LEDs on the operation panel are lit.  Exiting Procedures
- OFF: All LEDs on the operation panel are unlit. (1) Exit the MUTL.
 Exiting Procedures (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(1) Exit the MUTL. (3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

MU-70
[4] Software Check [4-2] MAC Address Display
[4-1] Ver. Display  Function/Purpose

The MAC address of the RU is displayed.
 Function/Purpose  Procedures
The software version of the RU is displayed. (1) View the indication on the screen.
 Procedures  Exiting Procedures

(1) View the indication on the screen.
(1) Exit the MUTL.
 Exiting Procedures (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(1) Exit the MUTL. (3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

MU-71
[5] Virtual Image Check  Procedures
u NOTE u
[5-1] LED Virtual Read Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu.
(1) Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/
 Function/Purpose TEST”.
Cause the blue LED of the PMT board to illuminate, and input the resulting light from the
light-collecting guide to generate image output. (2) Start the MUTL.
If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the scanning (3) Select the read conditions in “[5-1] LED Virtual Read”.
optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.
- OFF: Normal read
- ON (0.1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 0.1 mR
- ON (1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 1 mR
REFERENCE
Normally, use “ON (0.1 mR)”.

→ Read starts, and the image appears.
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-72
[5-2] PMT Virtual Read  Procedures
u NOTE u
 Function/Purpose Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu.
Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board.
It can be judged whether the failure of the light-collecting unit is responsible for the image (1) Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/
abnormality. TEST”.
(2) Start the MUTL.

- OFF: Normal read
- ON: Image data is created by LOG AMP.
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-73
[6] Scanner Check
[6-1] Polygon Motor
Turn ON or OFF the polygon.
When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a
predetermined time after the polygon is activated.
 Procedures
- ON: The polygon is activated to check the operation.
- OFF: The polygon is turned OFF.
 Results
 GOOD
“THE POLYGON IS TURNED ON (ST)” appears.
 NO GOOD
An error code appears.
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-74
[6-2] Laser  Exiting Procedures
(1) Exit the MUTL.
 Function/Purpose (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
Turn ON or OFF the laser.
When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are
diagnosed.
The LD current value is also displayed.
 Procedures
CAUTION
While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon.
If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly result in a
machine failure or fire.

- ON : The laser and the polygon are turned ON, and analyses take place.
: The LD current value is displayed.
- OFF : The polygon is turned OFF.
 Results
 GOOD
The following message appears.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT: 300
LDIFNOW: 0
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: 0
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
REFERENCE
- LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value
- LDIFNOW: Current value at present
- LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the factory
default until at present.
 NO GOOD

MU-75
[6-3] HV Diagnostic
[6-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic
The HV voltage is set in a range of 250 to 1000 and output. The set value (instruction value)
is compared with the actually output HV value (detection value), to check that the difference
between the instruction value and the detection value is in a range of +/-10%.
 Procedures
(1) Input the HV value (250 to 1000).
(2) [SET]
(1) Exit the MUTL.
 Results
 GOOD
“RESULT-OK” appears.
 NO GOOD

MU-76
[6-4] Format Adjustment
When the image is outputted under condition where the machine-specific data is installed, a
white blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some non-outputted portion (image
loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine adjustment.
u NOTE u
- Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV switch in
the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done.
- When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately
reflected.
- The result associated with the change becomes ineffective when the machine is rebooted.
Thus, in order to make the setup value effective after reboot or save the setup value, back
up the configuration data.
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be made,
Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment (Pixel) is done
first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once again, as a result of
Manual Adjustment (FREQ).

MU-77
[6-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) (3) Measure a misalignment of the reading width.
Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank
portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown below.
Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal
direction (main scan direction).
Its adjustable range is from -4% to +4%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the
image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
 Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u
- Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. --- Example ---
- To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x
thin article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the 35 cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35 cm x 43 cm) film:
actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted.
(175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%)
(1) Place a 175 mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x Since the adjustment will be made so as to enlarge the white blank portion, enter the
17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about value "2.8" in the Input range field.
1 mR.
REFERENCE
u INSTRUCTION u - The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
(2) Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure (1), and output the image. Use the menu
of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting
the image.
- The white blank portion within the output image reduces when you enter a minus (-)
value and enlarges when you enter a plus (+) value.

MU-78
(4) Start the MUTL. (8) Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure (1), and output the image. Use the menu
{MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”.
(5) Cancel the RU maintenance mode. u INSTRUCTION u

{MU:1.3_Maintenance Mode} Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting
the image.
(6) Input the adjustment value (example: “2.8”) of the main scan length calculated in
procedure (3) in the Input column of “[6-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)”.
u NOTE u (9) Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white
Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment.
RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained. (10) Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
#1
#2 (1) Exit the MUTL.

#3
2.8
#4
PRTM010404009.ai
(7) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.

MU-79
[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel) (3) Measure the extent to which the reading start position is shifted, and then
calculate an adjustment value.
Measure the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
 Function/Purpose accordance with the formula shown below.
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main scan
direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears on the side edge of the image, or a portion of
the image is not outputted).
Its adjustable range is from -500 to 500 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered,
the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a
positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
 Procedures
(1) Expose IPs of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u --- Example ---

If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) size is
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. outputted to a 14" x17" (35 cm x 43 cm) film:
(2) Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure (1), and output the image. Use the menu ((1/1 + 0.5) x 1) = 15 (PIXEL)
of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”. Since the adjustment will be made so as to reduce the white blank portion, enter the
value "15" in the Input range field.
u INSTRUCTION u
REFERENCE
- The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
the image.
- The white blank portion within the output image enlarges when you enter a minus (-)
value and reduces when you enter a plus (+) value.

MU-80
(4) Start the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures
{MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} (1) Exit the MUTL.
(5) Cancel the RU maintenance mode. (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(6) Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “15”) calculated in
procedure (3) in the Input column of “[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)”.
u NOTE u
Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the
RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
(9) Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
(10) Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.

{MU:1.16_BACKUP}

MU-81
[6-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line) (3) Measure the extent to which the reading start position is shifted, and then
Measure the size of the white blank portion in accordance with the formula shown
below.
Used to adjust the sub scan position per IP size. The following sizes can be set.
Layer 1 Layer 2 Command name
[6-4-3] [6-4-3-1] 18 x 24HR-VI
[6-4-3-2] 24 x 30HR-VI
 Procedures
REFERENCE
- The procedures are mentioned for setting “[6-4-3-1]18x24HR-VI” as an example. The
similar procedures are to be taken for other settings except the command name.
- IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type.
(1) Expose any IP of a size to be adjusted, with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 ---Example---
mR. If you want to narrow the IP leading-edge position by 1 mm when an IP of 18" x 24" HR
size is outputted to a film:
u INSTRUCTION u
30 (displayed value) - (10x1) = 20
Thus, “input range” is 20.
(2) Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and “SINGLE”, REFERENCE
read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output. - The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.

- The white blank portion b within the output image enlarges when you enter a value
larger than A (current value) and reduces when you enter a value smaller than A.

MU-82
(4) Start the MUTL. (8) Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and “SINGLE”,
{MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output.
(5) Cancel the RU maintenance mode. u INSTRUCTION u

{MU:1.3_Maintenance Mode} Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting
(6) Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “−20”) calculated in the image.
procedure 3 in the Input column of “[6-4-3] 118 x 24HR-VI”. {IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks}
u NOTE u (9) Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
- Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads “RESULT-OK.” If the (10) Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from 1 to 50. {MU:1.16_BACKUP}
#1  Exiting Procedures
(1) Exit the MUTL.
#2 (3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.
#3
#4
20
#5
RU PC-TOOL / MUTL
Are you sure ?
#6
OK CANCEL OK
PRTM010404008.ai

MU-83
[6-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel) (3) Measure the extent to which the reading start position is shifted, and then
Measure the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
 Function/Purpose accordance with the formula shown below.
Used to adjust the main scan position per IP size. The following sizes can be set.
Layer 1 Layer 2 Command name
[6-4-4] [6-4-4-1] 10 x 12 inch
[6-4-4-2] 08 x 10 inch
[6-4-4-3] 24 x 30 cm
[6-4-4-4] 18 x 24 cm
[6-4-4-5] 15 x 30 cm
[6-4-4-6] 30 x 24 cm
 Procedures
u NOTE u
--- Example ---
Carry out “[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)” before taking the procedures below. If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) size is
outputted to a 14" x17" (35 cm x 43 cm) film:
REFERENCE ((1/1 + 0.5) x 1) = 15 (PIXEL)
The procedures are mentioned for setting “[6-4-3-1]10x12 inch” as an example. The similar
Since the adjustment will be made so as to reduce the white blank portion, enter the
procedures are to be taken for other settings except the command name. value "15" in the Input range field.
(1) Expose an IP of an arbitrary size with a tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. REFERENCE
- The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
u INSTRUCTION u

u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
- The white blank portion within the output image enlarges when you enter a minus (-)
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks} value and reduces when you enter a plus (+) value.

MU-84
(4) Start the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures
{MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} (1) Exit the MUTL.
(5) Cancel the RU maintenance mode. (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(6) Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “15”) calculated in
procedure (3) in the Input column of "[6-4-3-1]10 x 12 inch".
u NOTE u
- Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the
RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -25 to 25.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
(9) Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.

{MU:1.16_BACKUP}

MU-85
[6-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ) [6-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ)
Unavailable menu for this machine.
 Function/Purpose Input no numerical values.
The value set in “[6-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)” is restored to the default value.
 Procedures
(1) [Manual Adjustment (FREQ)]
(2) [OK]
(1) Exit the MUTL.
[6-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel) [6-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel)

Unavailable menu for this machine.
 Function/Purpose Input no numerical values.
The value set in “[6-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)” is restored to the default value.
 Procedures
(1) [Manual Adjustment (Pixel)]
(2) [OK]
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-86
[6-5] Correction (7) Cancel the RU maintenance mode.
(8) Read the IP prepared in the procedure (2) for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
[6-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
u NOTE u
[6-5-1-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST) If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
ST shading/sensitivity correction takes place. Using this command, you can carry out
“[6-5-2-2] ST (GR)” and “[6-5-3-1] Sensitivity Correction (ST)” at the same time.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank
portion, an error might result.
- Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot
take place normally with other timings.
- Use a ST IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot
take place normally with other sizes or types.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures (9) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
“Shading/Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (1) to (9). “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (10) to (12).
(1) Measure and record the dose. (10) With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35
cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions.
(11) Read the IP obtained in step (9) during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Tungsten 1 80 200 Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
(3) Start the MUTL. (12) Confirm the S value.
(4) Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure (1) in “[6-5-1-1] Shading/ {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
Sensitivity Correction (ST)”.
(5) [SET] {MU:1.16_BACKUP}
(6) The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK].
(1) Exit the MUTL.
PRTM040404012.ai

MU-87
[6-5-1-2] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (HR) (8) Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
 Function/Purpose u NOTE u
HR shading/sensitivity correction takes place. Using this command, you can carry out If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
“[6-5-2-1] HR” and “[6-5-3-2] Sensitivity Correction (HR)” at the same time.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Use a HR IP of 24cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with
other sizes or types.
 Procedures
FRRB404018.ai
REFERENCE
“Shading/Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (1) to (9). (9) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
(1) Measure and record the dose. REFERENCE

(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions. “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 12.
(10) With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm IP to
Molybdenum 20 25 120 about 20 mR of radiation.
(3) Start the MUTL. (11) Read the IP obtained in step (9) during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
(4) Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “[6-5-1-2] Shading/Sensitivity minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Correction (HR)”. Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
(5) [SET] (12) Confirm the S value.
(6) The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
(1) Exit the MUTL.
PRTM040404012.ai


MU-88
[6-5-2] Shading Speed Correction (7) Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
[6-5-2-1] HR u NOTE u
If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
The polygon correction data of HR is generated.
Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out.
Use the “[6-5-1-2] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (HR)” command when sensitivity correction
is also to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTION u
take place normally with other timings. FRRB404018.ai
- Use a HR IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally

with other sizes or types. (8) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
 Procedures (1) Exit the MUTL.
(1) Measure and record the dose. (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions. (3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.
Molybdenum 20 25 120
(3) Start the MUTL.
(4) Click on “[6-5-2-1] HR”.

MU-89
[6-5-2-2] ST (GR) (7) Read the IP prepared in the procedure (2) for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
The polygon correction data of ST(GR) is generated. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out.
Use the “[6-5-1-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)” command when sensitivity correction
is also to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Use a ST (GR) IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction
cannot take place normally with other sizes or types.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
(1) Measure and record the dose. (8) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions.  Exiting Procedures

X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value (1) Exit the MUTL.
Tungsten 1 80 200
(3) Start the MUTL.
(4) Click on “[6-5-2-2] ST (GR)”.


MU-90
[6-5-3] Sensitivity Correction (7) Cancel the RU maintenance mode.
(8) Read the IP prepared in the procedure (2) for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
[6-5-3-1] Sensitivity Correction (ST) after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
u NOTE u
If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out.
Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out.
Use the “[6-5-1-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)” command when shading speed
correction is also to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Use a ST IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot
take place normally with other sizes or types.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures (9) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.

REFERENCE REFERENCE
“Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (1) to (9). “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (10) to (12).
(1) Measure and record the dose. (10) With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions. cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value (11) Read the IP obtained in step (9) during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
Tungsten 1 80 200 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
(3) Start the MUTL.
(12) Confirm the S value.
(4) Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure (1) in “[6-5-3-1] Sensitivity
Correction (ST)”. {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
(5) [SET]
(6) The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK].  Exiting Procedures
(1) Exit the MUTL.
PRTM040404012.ai

MU-91
[6-5-3-2] Sensitivity Correction (HR) (8) Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out.
Use the “[6-5-1-2] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (HR)” command when shading speed
correction is also to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Use a HR IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally
with other sizes or types.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
(9) Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 9 are performed to make sensitivity correction. REFERENCE
“Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 12.
(1) Measure and record the dose.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions. (10) With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm IP to
about 20 mR of radiation.
(11) Read the IP obtained in step (9) during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
Molybdenum 20 25 120
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
(3) Start the MUTL. Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
(4) Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “[6-5-3-2] Sensitivity (12) Confirm the S value.
Correction (HR)”.
(5) [SET] (13) Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
(1) Exit the MUTL.
PRTM040404012.ai


MU-92
[6-5-4] Special Sensitivity Correction  Procedures: Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When Tungsten
X-Ray Tube Is Used
Sensitivity correction is performed for the IP type HR depending on the type of the X-ray tube
CAUTIONS
to be used at the user’s site. When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done.
Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction.
u INSTRUCTION u
{MU:4.3 [6-5-1-2]_Shading Correction (HR)}
X-ray dose required for exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube. Make exposure
according to the following conditions. The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions:
Tungsten X-ray tube : About 3.6 mR - The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the
Molybdenum X-ray tube : About 20 mR CPU27A board;
- The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures
of the RU application.
REFERENCE
- The X-ray tube selection menu is recognized as follows:
AUTO SELECT : The IP type HR is automatically recognized as one irradiated by the u INSTRUCTION u
molybdenum X-ray tube for correction. Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
TUNGSTEN FIX : Correction is performed by the X-ray tube (tungsten) with the IP type
HR specified. u NOTE u
- The S value is indicated as follows depending on the irradiation output. Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray
<When a molybdenum X-ray tube is used> exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot be properly
For 2 mR : The S value is 1200. made.
For 20 mR : The S value is 120.
<When a tungsten X-ray tube is used>
REFERENCE
For 0.36 mR : The S value is 1200. “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from (1) to (7).
For 3.6 mR : The S value is 120.
(1) Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
(2) With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to
about 3.6 mR of radiation.
(3) Start the MUTL.

MU-93
(4) Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 3.4 mR), and then prepare for (7) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
correction.
REFERENCE
REFERENCE Steps 8 to 12 are performed for sensitivity correction verification.
When the measured X-ray dose is 3.4 mR, enter the value 3.4.
When the measured X-ray dose is 3.0 mR, enter the value 3. (8) Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
(9) With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to
#1 about 3.6 mR of radiation.
(10) Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
#2 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
"SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
#3
(11) Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value.
REFERENCE
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
0.36 mR: The S value is 1200.
#4 #5 3.6 mR: The S value is 120.
36 mR: The S value is 12.
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "13. Confirming the S Value."
3.4 {IN:13._Confirming the S Value}
#6 (12) Back up the corrected data.

#7
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
RU PC-TOOL / MUTL  Exiting Procedures

Are you sure ?
#8
OK CANCEL (1) Exit the MUTL.
OK
PRTM010404011.ai (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.

MU-94
 Procedures:Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When (4) Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 18.1 mR), and then prepare for
Molybdenum X-Ray Tube Is Used correction.
REFERENCE
CAUTIONS When the measured X-ray dose is 18.1 mR, enter the value 18.1.
When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done. When the measured X-ray dose is 20.0 mR, enter the value 20.
Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction.
{MU:4.3 [6-5-1-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} #1
The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions:
- The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the #2
CPU27A board;
- The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures of
the RU application.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
#3
u NOTE u
Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an
X-ray exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot
be properly made. #4 #5
REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction. 18.1
(1) Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. #6
#7
(2) With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR
IP to about 20 mR of radiation.
RU PC-TOOL / MUTL
(3) Start the MUTL. Are you sure ? #8
OK CANCEL
OK
PRTM010404010.ai

u INSTRUCTION u
the image.

MU-95
(7) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. [6-5-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction
REFERENCE
Steps 8 to 12 are performed for sensitivity correction verification. [6-5-5-1] Existing S-Value
(8) Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
(9) With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR [6-5-5-2] Expected S-Value
IP to about 20 mR of radiation.
(10) Read the IP obtained in step 8 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11  Function/Purpose
Correct the S value appearing on the film and the screen.
For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 mR is
u INSTRUCTION u read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200.
the image.
(11) Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value.
REFERENCE
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
200 mR: The S value is 12.  Procedures
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "13. Confirming the S Value."
Procedures for correcting the indication of 195 to 200 are described as an example.
(1) Input the current S value (195) in “[6-5-5-1] Existing S-Value”.
(12) Back up the corrected data. (2) Input the S value (200) to be displayed, in “[6-5-5-2] Expected S-Value”.
{MU:1.16_BACKUP}
(3) [SET]
 Exiting Procedures (4) Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
(1) Exit the MUTL.
(2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.  Exiting Procedures
(3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. (1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-96
[6-6] Trouble Shooting [6-7] HV ON/OFF
CAUTION CAUTION
Normally, be sure to set it to "ON". Check to make sure that the plate has been put on to shield the inside of the housing
If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity. against light, before turning ON the HV switch. If the HV switch is turned ON without
the inside of the housing shielded against light, the photomultiplier may get damaged.
REFERENCE
The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, or REFERENCE
when IP reading operation is performed once or more. - This can be set only when the HV switch on the CPU board of the RU is ON.
- The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON.
[6-6-1] Shading Correction

Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
For trouble shooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the  Procedures
shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. (1) Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function.
 Procedures - ON: The HV switch is turned ON.

- OFF: The HV switch is turned OFF.
- ON: Normal read  Exiting Procedures
- OFF: An image is output without using shading correction data. (1) Exit the MUTL.
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-97
[6-8] S Value [6-8-2] S Value Calculate
[6-8-1] S Value Now  Function/Purpose

Performs calculations on the X-ray dose to determine the S value that corresponds to the
X-ray dose.
Displays the initial S value and current S value.  Procedures
Follow the procedures of confirming the S value when needed after the check. (1) Input the X-ray dose.
 Procedures (2) [Set]

(1) [S value now] → The S value corresponding to the input X-ray dose appears.
→ A and B appear. REFERENCE
S (now) = 196 (98%) If the X-ray dose value is set to "1", the following message appears in the MUTL
S (start) = 200 window.
(2) Check the results.
(3) Confirm the S value as needed.

(1) Exit the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures
(2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. (1) Exit the MUTL.
(3) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. (2) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.

MU-98
[6-8-3] PMT/Light Guide Change [7] For Design
Commands for design.
[6-8-3-1] LED Initialize Not used for servicing.
Initializes the LED data after light-collecting unit replacement to set the initial value for S
value error detection.
 Procedures
(1) [LED initialize]
(2) [OK]
(3) Verify that the MUTL message field reads "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED."
(4) Exit the MUTL.
(5) Back up "SCN ALL DATA".
(1) Exit the MUTL.

MU-99
BLANK PAGE

Appx MU-1
Appendix.1 Procedures for

Changing the RU IP Address
Register a new RU IP address in the RU PC-TOOL when the RU IP address is to be changed.
u NOTE u
The RU IP address which has been registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-
TOOL cannot be changed.
(1) Select the RU which is registered in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-
TOOL, and change the RU IP address in [MUTL].
{MU:4.3[1]_Network Address}
(2) Click on [NEW] in the RU PC-TOOL, input the RU name in “RU NAME”, and input
the IP address specified in the procedure (1) in “RU IP ADDR”.
(3) Click on [INSTALL] in the RU PC-TOOL, and install the RU software.

{MU:1.11_INSTALL}
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
(5) Shut down the Console and the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch of the
RU.
(6) Start the Console and the RU. The service utility of the Console is started. (Click
on the upper left and the upper right in this order on the Console software start
window).
{Console Service Manual}
(7) For the RU registered in the console, change the host name and the IP address of
the “RU that has changed the IP address”.
(8) Exit from the service utility of the Console.

(9) From the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL, delete the RU which has
been registered with the old IP address.
{MU:1.6_DELETE}
RU.
(11) Start up the Console and the RU.
(12) Check to make sure that the image can be correctly read.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Appx MU-1

Appx MU-2
Appendix.2 Procedures for Changing

the IP Address of the FTP Server
Registered in RU
(1) Change the IP address of the FTP server in the MUTL.
{MU:4.3[1]_Network Address}
(2) Click on “EDIT CL NAME” of the RU PC-TOOL, and change “CL NAME” and “CL
IP ADDRESS”.
RU.
(5) Start up the Console and the RU.
(6) Check that images can be correctly read on the Console.

Appx MU-3
Appendix.3 Procedures for Returning the IP Address

and FTP Server Address Specified in
the RU to the Default Values
(1) While pressing the [Eraser button] and the [Stand-by switch] on the operation
panel, turn ON the main power switch. Keep pressing the [Eraser button] and
[Stand-by switch] until the machine is normally started.
→ The IP address and the FTP server address specified in the RU are restored to the
default values. The default settings are as follows.

Appx MU-4
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Service Parts List (SP)

SP-1
How to Use ● Fault RANK characters (which

provide reference for determining the
■ PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
■ REFER TO
The "REFER TO" column shows reference
Service Parts List recom-mended stock quantity) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number has
sections concerning the part.Clicking the
All parts are assigned with one of reference section in the "REFER TO" column
the following meaning. jumps to the top page of the reference section
characters A through E.
■ RANK Character Significance where the related information is in.
○ For hardware
Consumable parts or parts that The alphabet denotes the version number
● Handling RANK characters (parts A ■ Quantities of recommended spare
will be replaced at short intervals. of a part. If parts have different version
that are handled in a special Parts that may become faulty numbers, they are upward-compatible. parts
manner during parts operation, B accidentally and have a relatively
○ For software It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
such as management) high failure rate.
The alphabet denotes a difference in the in stock a certain quantity of parts according
Parts that have a sufficiently long
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty C MTBF, but are expected to have a
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
R Must be returned. Repairable relatively high failure rate. are not compatible with each other. Version parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Must be returned. Parts that have a sufficiently number is omitted in the list. parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
Q (We use for Not repairable D long MTBF, but are expected to the stock quantity of service parts depending
analysis.) become faulty. ■ PART NAME on the number of working units (N).
Parts that are necessary for fault PART NAME represents a general name of a
Must Not be Quantity used in a single system : Q
returned. analysis, or parts that may be part.
E needed in case of unexpected ○N=1
(Consumable
accidents such as man-induced ■ QTY. Rank A ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.3
T part. Not Not repairable
damage. ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in Rank C ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.05
applicable to
free-of-charge each unit. Rank D ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide>
warranty.) ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK
without Must Not be characters, and Export regulation-applicable represents a small part that is shipped in Rank A ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered in Rank C ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
character are assigned in that order.
Thus, at least one character or up to three quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces of Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
● Export regulation-applicable characters are assigned in the RANK column. that part is supplied.)
○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character(Parts with the following
■ REF.NO. ■ REMARKS Rank A ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
character are controlled by Export Rank C ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
regulation.) REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
name of a part or relevant information of each
Character Significance Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts
part.
Parts applicable to export
having different functions, they are clearly ■ Precautions to be Observed When
＋ distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL ■ SERIAL NUMBER Returning Parts for Repair
regulations.
NUMBER columns. The units may contain different parts
When returning a component for repair, pack
depending on their shipment control number.
it in the same manner as for the
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
supplied substitute, using the substitute
control number to which the relevant parts are
packing materials.
applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER column
The use of different packing materials or
is blank, the parts are applicable to all the
packing methods may incur damage to
relevant units. The shipment control number
packed component during transit.
is represented by lower five digits of eight-
digit number indicated on the rating indication
label.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual SP-1

SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 10
● カバー ● ケーブル
COVER CABLE
INDEX 02 INDEX 11
● カセッテセット部 ● 回路図
CASSETTE SET UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INDEX 03 INDEX 12
● 消去部 ● 部品番号検索表
ERASURE UNIT PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
INDEX 04 INDEX 13
● 搬送部 ● 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
CONVEYOR List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
INDEX 05
● 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
INDEX 06
● 集光部
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT
INDEX 07
● 副走査部
SUB SCANNING UNIT
INDEX 08
● 制御部
CONTROLLER
INDEX 09
● オプション
OPTION
020-234-01C CR-IR 392 Service Manual SP-2

SP-3
01A
01A カバー 1
COVER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Operation Panel
E 1 350N102766 操作パネルカバー 1
Cover
E 2 405N120380A 銘板 Label 1
E 3 405N120381 銘板 Label 1
D 4 386N100471 衝撃緩衝材 Shock Absorber 1
E 5 350N102767 上面カバー Top Cover 1
E 6 340N100312 操作ボタン Operation Button 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 7 113Y100694B 1
（PNL37A） (PNL37A)
E 8 350N102768 背面カバー Rear Cover 1
Right-Hand Side
E 9 350N102770A 右側面カバー 1
Cover
E 10 350N102765 前面上カバー Front-Side Top Cover 1
Front-Side
E 11 350N102769 前面下カバー 1
Bottom Cover
E 12 350N120151D 左側面カバー Left-Hand Side Cover 1

SP-4
01B
01B カバー 2
COVER 2
E 1 405N102614 銘板 Label 4
Rear-Side Top
E 2 345N101059B 背面上遮板 1
Light Protect Plate
Rear-Side Bottom
E 3 345Y100185A 背面下遮板 1
Light Protect Plate
E 4 345N101064B 上面遮板 Top Light Protect Plate 1
Left-Hand Side
E 5 345N120094D 左側面遮板 1
Light Protect Plate
D 6 358Y120010B 基板ボックスカバー Board Box Cover 1
D 7 386N120083B 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3
D 8 386N120085B 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1
D 9 367N100097A 脚 Foot 4
D 10 386N100395 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2
Bottom
E 11 345Y100186A 底面遮板 1
Light Protect Plate

SP-5
02A カセッテセット部 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1
D 1 398N120004A シャッタ Shutter 1
D 2 388N100791A ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1
Compression Coil
D 3 388N100790A 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
E 4 341N100458B アーム Arm 1
SA1, SA4,
D 5 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4
SA6, SA7
E 6 310S9042016 平行ピン Straight Pin 1
D 7 327N100467A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 8 327N100293 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
E 9 341N100237 アーム Arm 1

SP-6
02B カセッテセット部 2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2
D 1 388N100792A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1
D 2 360N100404A ハウジング Housing 2
D 3 322SY165 すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 2
D 4 388N100801 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1
D 5 118SX213 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MA1
D 6 327N100289 歯車 Gear 1
D 7 356N106009 ブラケット Bracket 1
E 9 341N100237 アーム Arm 1
D 10 327N100471B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 12 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA3
E 13 322N100221A すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 2

SP-7
02C カセッテセット部 3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3
D 1 146S0082 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA5-1
D 2 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 3 SA2, SA8, SA9
D 3 332N100275D ストッパ Stopper 3
D 4 363N101042B 受 Guide 1
D 5 363N120039D 受 Guide 1
マンモカセッテ検出 Mammography
D 6 812Y120059 1 SA10
ユニット Cassette Detection Unit
D 7 332N100274C ストッパ Stopper 1
D 8 387N100023 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 9 107Y0183A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLA1
D 10 322N100199 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
E 11 319Y1164B 軸 Shaft 1
D 13 362N120031B 受 Guide 1
D 14 322SY097 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
D 16 362N100497A 受 Guide 2
D 18 146S0028A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA16
Compression Coil
D 19 388N120056A 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
D 20 362N100236 受 Guide 1
D 21 388N100789B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1

SP-8
02D カセッテセット部 4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4
D 1 322N100310A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
D 2 322N100228 軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 3 363N101037C ガイド Guide 2
D 4 134S0058A 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 1 SVA1
D 5 370N100359A ホース Horse 2
D 6 316S1082 束線部品 Cable Tie 2
A 7 133Y100031A 電動ポンプ Pump 1 PA1
D 8 372S0050A 管継手 Joint 2
D 9 372S0048 管継手 Joint 1
D 10 372S0053A 管継手 Joint 1
D 11 370N100358A ホース Horse 1
D 12 371N100114A 管継手 Joint 1
D 13 375N100012A パッキン Packing 1
D 14 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 1
E 15 341Y120031B アーム Arm 1
D 16 363N101051B ガイド Guide 3
D 17 801Y120001 ローラユニット Roller Unit 1

SP-9
02E カセッテセット部 5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5
D 1 334Y120017A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
D 2 334N3677 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3
D 3 362N100503B 受 Guide 3
D 4 356N120360A 受 Guide 2
D 5 146S0083 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA5-2
D 6 363N101050A ガイド Guide 2
D 7 118Y100111A モータ Motor 1 MA2
D 9 362N100501B 受 Guide 1
D 10 362N100502B 受 Guide 4
D 11 332N100265B ガイド Guide 1
Compression Coil
D 12 388N100786 圧縮コイルバネ 4
Spring
D 13 332N100266B ガイド Guide 4
D 14 322N100221A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
Compression Coil
D 15 388N120058B 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
D 16 332N120016D ガイド Guide 1
D 17 327N120018A カム Cam 1
Compression Coil
D 18 388N120057A 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
E 20 310S9042010 平行ピン Straight Pin 5

SP-10
02F カセッテセット部 6
CASSETTE SET UNIT 6
E 1 338N100132B スペーサ Spacer 4
D 7 334N120015A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
D 8 118Y100124 モータ Motor 1 MA5
D 9 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA11
D 10 146S0028A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA12
D 11 338N120051A スペーサ Spacer 1
D 12 327N120016C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 13 824Y120008 モータアセンブリ Motor Assembly 1

SP-11
03 消去部
ERASURE UNIT
D 1 840Y120013 消去部 Erasure Unit 1
D 2 407N120002C 反射板 Reflective Plate 1
D 3 356Y120124B ブラケット Bracket 1
A 4 603Y120014 フィルタ Filter 1
E 5 138S0562 フェライトコア Ferrite Core 1

SP-12
04A 搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1
D 3 327N100472 歯車 Gear 1
D 10 322SB056 スペーサ Spacer 2
D 11 118SX210 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC1
A 15 334N120030 ブラシローラ Brush Roller 2
E 16 338N100132B スペーサ Spacer 4
D 17 387N0187B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2

SP-13
04B 搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2
D 2 322SB052 すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 2
E 3 332SB056 スペーサ Spacer 2
D 5 146N0016B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC3
D 6 387Y0019B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
Rubber Roller
D 7 334N3619 ゴムローラ 3
Assembly
D 8 334Y100152 ローラ Roller 3

SP-14
04C 搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3
D 1 322N100221A ころがり軸受 Bearing 2
D 2 327N120011D 歯車 Gear 1
D 4 327N120012C 歯車 Gear 1
D 5 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC1
D 6 118SX208A ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC2
D 7 341N100625 アーム Arm 2
D 8 310S9043015 平行ピン Straight Pin 2
D 9 319N120097 軸 Shaft 1

SP-15
05 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
D 1 839Y100052 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1

SP-16
06 集光部
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT
D 2 113Y100317G 1
(PMT27A) (PMT27A)
D 3 815Y100060 集光ガイド Light-Collecting Guide 1

SP-17
07A 副走査部 1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1
D 1 363Y100351C ガイド Guide 1
D 2 364Y100039B ガイド Guide 1
D 3 334N100162C ローラ Roller 3

SP-18
07B 副走査部 2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2
D 1 388N120073A ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1
D 2 327N120013E 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 3 327N100619B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 4 118Y100110A ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MZ2
D 5 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ2
D 6 118Y100162A モータ Motor 1 MZ1
D 7 322SP211 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4
Compression Coil
D 8 388N1234 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
D 9 309N100022 平座金 Plain Washer 2
E 10 323N1266 ベルト Belt 1
D 11 337N0070A ホイール Flywheel 2
D 12 334N100423 平ベルト車 Wheel 1
E 13 323N100076B ベルト Belt 1
D 14 337N0071B ホイール Flywheel 1

SP-19
07C 副走査部 3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3
D 2 322SB051 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2
D 4 360N100236 ハウジング Housing 2
D 7 387N100021B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4
D 8 363N100811 ガイド Guide 1

SP-20
07D 副走査部 4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4
D 4 360N100236 ハウジング Housing 2
D 7 113Y100316D 1
（SED27A） (SED27A)
D 8 350N101476 カバー Cover 1
D 9 308S0565 ネジ Screw 3

SP-21
07E 副走査部 5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5

SP-22
07F 副走査部 6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6
D 2 322N100220B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 3 356N103587A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 4 322N100216D すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
D 5 334Y120016A ローラ Center Roller Assy 1
D 7 356N103591B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 363N100689 ガイド Guide 1
D 10 387N100002A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 11 602Y100002 ミラー Mirror 1

SP-23
08 制御部
CONTROLLER
D 3 358N100126C カバー Cover 2
C 4 113Y100692A 1
（CPU37A） (CPU37A)
C 5 113Y100693A 1
（SND37A） (SND37A)
D 7 386N100407A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4
D 8 386N100408A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4
D 9 369N120041B ダクト Duct 1
D 10 119S0095 電動ファン Fan 1 FAN1
D 11 369N100141A ダクト Duct 1
E 12 350N102065B カバー Cover 1
D 13 128S1173 ブレーカ Breaker 1
D 14 120S5277 ソケット Socket 1
Power Supply
C 16 125N120015 電源（PSU37B） 1
(PSU37B)
Power Supply
C 17 125N120014 電源（PSU37A） 1
(PSU37A)

SP-24
09 オプション
OPTION
■ 落下防止金具キット／ Anti-drop retainer kit ■ 落下防止金具キット／ Anti-drop retainer kit

E 1 356Y101459C 取付け金具 Bracket 2 －
E 2 357Y100473A 底板 Base Plate 1 －
E 3 304S0067 固定ネジ Screw 4 －
E 4 306SF004016 タッピンネジ（4x16）Tapping screw (4x16) 4 －
E 5 347N100879 スペーサ Spacer 4 －
Screw (Cross
ネジ（十字穴付き
E 6 308S2780516 recessed head double 4 －
W セムスネジ M5x16）
sems screw M5x16)

SP-25
10 ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
E 1 136N0377 ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 2 136N0427 ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 3 136N0450 ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 4 136Y103125 ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 5 136Y103126A ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 6 136Y103127B ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 7 136Y103129C ケーブル Cable 1 2/4
E 8 136Y103132B ケーブル Cable 1 3/4
E 9 136Y103134A ケーブル Cable 1 3/4
E 10 136Y120455D ケーブル Cable 1 3/4, 4/4
E 11 136Y120456C ケーブル Cable 1 4/4
E 12 136Y120878A ケーブル Cable 1 4/4
E 13 136Y120879 ケーブル Cable 1 3/4
E 14 136Y8545B ケーブル Cable 1 2/4

SP-26
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
FAN-A CNSN3-P
1 4
FAN1
1
2 3 +
3 2 3
- 119S0095
1 1 4
2 2406KL-05W-B29-T12
3
［国内：Japan］　136N0416　（患者環境外：Outside patient environment）　

B B
［国内：Japan］　136N0417　（患者環境内：Within patient environment）　
［米国：USA］　　136N0427
［英国：UK］　　　136N0450 INLET SWH7 PSU37A PSU37B SND37A 1/4
［欧州：Europe］ 136N0377
120S5277 PSU27A-CN1 PSU27A-CN51 PSU27B-CN1
136Y103125 128S1173 136Y103126 125N120014 136Y103127 125N120015 PSU27B-CN5 SND-CN2 113Y100693
L AC(L) LINE_L LOAD_L 1 GND 136Y103129
L AC(L) 1 8
1 VCC_5V
2 GND
1
2 7 1.4A
N AC(N) N AC(N) 2 GND_B
GND 3120-F521-P7T1 3 3 GND 6
2
1.4A
E 3 VCC_24V
E GND -W01K-10A 4 4 GND 5
3
5A
4 GND_C 4
LINE_N LOAD_N 5 5 +24V 4 5A
PLUG
6 +24V 3
AC-P12CF36-1.0 7 +24V 2
8 +24V 1
1
C
FG　 FG C
PSU27B-CN6 INV-A INV-B 4

1 VCC_24V 1
2 GND 3
3 2
4 4
D D
PSU27B-CN2 CPU-CN1 CPU37A 1/3

1 POWER_ON 1
113Y100692
2 GND 2
3 VH_AUX(12V) 3
3.5A
4 GND 4
5 VCC(5V) 5
2.4A
6 GND 6
7 VCC_24PS 7
1.0A
8 GND_P 8
PSU27B-CN3 CPU-CN18
E E
1 +15ASIN 1
0.9A
2 GND_A 2
3 -15ASIN 3
0.3A
4 GND_A 4
F F
G G
H H
機種 -- ユニット -
名称回路図補助名称 PRITWO-M
コード Z22N2245001 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-27
11
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
光学部
CPU27A-CN15 LDD27A-CN5
1 V5_D
136Y103132
1
1.6A
Scanning Optics Unit
2 GND 2 LDD27A-CN7
A
136Y101881 A
3 V5_D 3
1.6A 1 VCC5V_A 2
4 GND 4 2 1 PD
LDONH PDA 104Y100007
LDD27A
5 5 3
6 LDONL 6 4
7 LDOKH 7 5
8 LDOKL 8 113Y100312 6 LDK 3
9 LDIFH 9 7 VCC_LD 2
LD
10 LDIFL 10 8 1
124Y100022
11 VREF_DA 11
12 GND 12
13 V5_D 13
1.6A
14 LD_IDLEL 14
15 LD_TMPH 15
16 A0 16
B 17 A1 17
B
18 EN 18
19
20
CPU37A 2/3
113Y100692
集光部
Light Collecting Unit
C CPU27A-CN17 PMT27A-CN1 C
1 HVMONH 1
2 HVMONL 2
3 +15VOKH 3
4 +15VOKL 4
5 HVSH 5
6 HVSL 6 CPU-CN4 CNZ32-J CNZ32-P SYN27A-CN3 SYN27A-CN2 POL-CN1

136Y102013
7 VCC_+15AS 7 8 1 1 1 1 1
8 GND_A 8 7 2 2
136Y8891 2 2 2
VCC_+15AS (On-board) Polygon

PIDXL
SYN27A
9 9 6 3 3 3 3 3
10 GND_A 10
GND 5 4 4 4 4 4
615N100006
11 VCC_+15AS 11
PONL 4 5 5 5 5 5
12 GND_A 12
POKL 3 6 6 6 113Y100314 6 6
13 VCC_-15AS 13
GND 2 7 7 7 7 7
D 14 GND_A 14
VCC_24PS 1 8 8 8
3.2A 8 8 D
15 ERSH 15
ERSL
PMT27A CPU37A
16 16
17 LEDSIGH 17 3/3
18 LEDSIGL 18
19 LEDONH 19 113Y100317 113Y100692 CPU27A-CN19 CNZ31-J CNZ31-P SYN27A-CN1

136Y8890 (On-board)
20 LEDONL 20 1 1 1 1
1.6A
21 VION_H 21 2 2 2 2
22 VION_L 22
GND 3 3 3 3
23 4 4 4 4 始点センサー
24 Start point sensor
SSL 5 5 5 5
25
SSH 6 6 6 6
26
27
28
E E
29
30
CPU27A-CN14 SZ1
SED27A
31
32 SED2L 1 1
33 SED1L 2 2
34 V5_D 3 3
1.6A 113Y100316
4 4
GND
CPU27A-CN13 PMT27A-CN2
1 1
読取先端検出 Edge detect
2
CPU27A-CN9 PNL-A PNL-B PNL37A-CN1

136Y120879 136Y103134
VCC 1 1 1 VCC 1
GND 2 2 2 UART_TXD 2
F
VCC_AUX 3 3 3 VCC_AUX 3 F
GND 4 4 4 UART_RXD 4
KEY0_IN 5 5 5 5
電源ボタン Power button
KEY1_IN 6 6 6 6
消去ボタン Erasure button
7 7 7 7
CPU-CN3 SND27A-CN14 挿入LED Cassette IN LED
1
2
136Y120455 (1/3) CAN_TX
CAN_RX
1
2
SND37A 2/4 8
9
8
9
8
9 9
8
排出LED Cassette OUT LED
大線量LED Over-dose LED
113Y100693 10 10 10 10
消去中LED Erasure LED
11 11 11 11
ブザー Buzzer
PLED0_OUT 12 12 12 GND 12
PLED1_OUT 13 13 13 VCC 13
BZR_OUT 16 16 16
17
G G
18
PNL37A
19
GND 20
113Y100694
CPU27A-CN5
VCC 1
3 7セグLED用通信
UART_RXD1 7-segment display control
4
5
UART_TXD1
6
GND 7
8
H H
9 機種 -- ユニット -
10
11
12 コード Z22N2245001 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-28
11
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SND27A-CN6 SA1
136Y120455 (2/3) SND27A-CN9 MA5
1 1
SA1 A 1
136Y120456
5 1 A1
VCC S1 2 2
ｶｾｯﾃIN検出 A3(A1/)
146S0102 COM 2 4 2
SEN1 3 3
A2,B2(Common)
GND1 4 (Cassette IN) B 3 3 3
B1 MA5
A /A 4 2 4
A
VCC S2 5
B3(B3/)
6 SA2 5 1 5
SEN2
/B 6
GND2 7 1
VCC S3 8 2 SA2 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出 MT2A 7
8
幅寄せｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ
SEN3 9 3 146S0102 +24V 2A 切替ﾓｰﾀ
(Cassette hold) MT2AB 9
GND3 10
11 +24V 2AB 10
VCC S4
SA6 MT2B 11
SEN4 12
MA1
+24V 2B
SA6
12
GND4 13 1
13 1
MT3A
VCC S5 14 2 IP突出防止ｺﾏHPｾﾝｻ吸盤駆動モータ
146S0102 +24V 3A 14 2
SEN5 15
16
3
MT3AB 15 3 MA1 Sucker driving motor
GND5
+24V 3AB 16 4
118SX213 0.567A(0.2A)
On/Off1 17
SA7 MT3AB 17 5
LDSND1 18
18 6
+24V 3AB
B 1
2
SA7 幅寄せ位置ｾﾝｻ MT3B 19
B
3 146S0102 24DRV1 20
SOL1
1
2
SOL1
SND27A-CN8 SA3
107Y0183A
SA3 消去部
3
1
4 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞSOL
2 吸盤HP検出 Cassette Hold Solenoid
3 146S0102
(Sucker HP)
Erasure Unit 1.26A(0.24A)
SND27A-CN11 SVA1
2 INV-A INV-B 1 1 SVA1
2 2
1 134N120001
3
3
0.12A IPリーク IP leak
ERS37B
4
C
2
ERS-CN1 5 MC2 C
4
SND37A SND37A
1 6 1
3/4 2 113N120100 4/4 7 2
3 8 3 MC2 ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除
113Y100693 4 113Y100693 9 4
ﾎｺﾘ除去ﾓｰﾀ
5 10 5 118SX214
6 11 6
12
13
24DRV2 14 MA2
SND27A-CN5 SA10
DCMCW 15 1 MA2
SNS37A DCMCCW
1 1 16 2
118Y100082
S07 2
3
2
3
SA10 17
18
幅寄駆動モータ
VCC S8 4 113Y120154
D D
5
SEN8
SA8
GND8 6
SND27A-CN12
VCC S9 7 1
SA8 PA1
SEN9 8 2
146S0102
ｶｾｯﾃ小ｻｲｽﾞ検出 +24V FANONOFFDRV 1 1
PA1
GND9 9 3 2 2
VCC S10 10 3 3 133Y100031

11 0.12A IP吸着 IP adsorption pump
GND FAN 4
12 SA9
13
14
1
2
SA9 ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓｶｾｯﾃ判別
15 3 146S0102 (Pantomography cassette) SND27A-CN10 MC1
GND11
ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓ対応機で使用
16
MT6A 1 1
Built for Pantomography
+24V 6A 2 2
E
MT6B 3 3
MC1 幅寄せ搬送モータ
E
SND27A-CN4 SA4 +24V 6B 4 4
5 5 118SX213 Side-Positioning motor

+24V 6AB
VCC S12 1 1
SA4 ｶｾｯﾃOUT検出 MT6BB 6 6 0.632A(0.0A)
SEN12 2 2
3 3 146S0102 (Cassette OUT) MT7A 7

GND12
4 +24V 7A 8
S13 5 MT7AB 9
10 MZ1
MT7B
6
SA11 副走査モータ
+24V 7B 11 1
VCC S14 7
1
MT7BB 12 2
Sub scanning motor
SEN14 8
2
SA11 +24V 9 13 3 MZ1
GND14 9
0.872A(0.2A)
3
24V DRV3 14 4
118SX214
VCC S15 10
15 5
11 +24V 相当品
GND 16 6
12
SA12
13
1
F F
14
MZ2
2
3
SA12 1
SA5-2 2
1
SA5-2 3
MZ2 ｿﾌﾄﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
2 4
NIP release motor
3 118SX214 0.872A(0.2A)
146S0083 IP長さ検出ｾﾝｻ 5
4 6
IP落下(受光)
下側
SA5-1
1
2
SA5-1 IP長さ検出ｾﾝｻ
146S0082 IP落下(発光)
3
(IP Fall：radiation)
上側
G G
SC3
1
SC3 IP検出1
2
146N0016
3
(IP-detect 1)
SND27A-CN7 SC1
SND27A-CN3 136Y120455 (3/3)
1 1
1
S16 2
SA16-S SA16-P 136Y120878
SA16 S20 2
3
2
3
SC1
3 1 1 1
SA16
4
4 2 2 2
VCC S17
S21 FAN_IL 5
SEN17 5 3 3 3
6
GND17 6
7
7
8
S18 8
H 9 SZ2 ＜注意事項＞機種ユニット -
H
- --
VCC S19 10 1
SEN19 11 2 SZ2 副走査ﾆｯﾌﾟｾﾝｻ

GND19 12 3
対応コード - コード Z22N2245001 Rev.
146S0102
設計日設計者製図者検図者承認者
頁
2014.08.28 萩原新保渡辺五十嵐M 富士フイルム株式会社 4 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-29
12 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
107Y0183A 02C-9 309N100022 07B-9 327N120018A 02E-17 356N120360A 02E-4 388N100531A 02F-14
113Y100316D 07D-7 310S9042010 02E-20 332N100265B 02E-11 356Y101459C 09-1 388N100531A 04A-13
113Y100317G 06-2 310S9042016 02A-6 332N100266B 02E-13 356Y120124B 03-3 388N100531A 04A-14
113Y100692A 08-4 310S9043015 04C-8 332N100274C 02C-7 357Y100473A 09-2 388N100784A 02E-8
113Y100693A 08-5 316S1082 02D-6 332N100275D 02C-3 358N100126C 08-3 388N100786 02E-12
113Y100694B 01A-7 319N120097 04C-9 332N120016D 02E-16 358Y120010B 01B-6 388N100789B 02C-21
118SX208A 04C-6 319Y1164B 02C-11 332SB056 04B-3 360N100236 07C-4 388N100790A 02A-3
118SX210 04A-11 322N100199 02C-10 334N100162C 07A-3 360N100236 07D-4 388N100791A 02A-2
118SX213 02B-5 322N100216D 07F-4 334N100423 07B-12 360N100404A 02B-2 388N100792A 02B-1
118Y100110A 07B-4 322N100219 07F-6 334N120015A 02F-7 360N100404A 02F-3 388N100800 02C-12
118Y100111A 02E-7 322N100220B 07F-2 334N120030 04A-15 360N100404A 04A-8 388N100801 02B-4
118Y100124 02F-8 322N100221A 02B-13 334N120031A 07C-6 360N100404A 04B-1 388N120056A 02C-19
118Y100162A 07B-6 322N100221A 02E-14 334N120032A 07D-6 362N100236 02C-20 388N120057A 02E-18
119S0095 08-10 322N100221A 04C-1 334N120033A 04A-12 362N100497A 02C-16 388N120058B 02E-15
120S5277 08-14 322N100228 02D-2 334N120034A 04B-4 362N100501B 02E-9 388N120062A 02C-17
125N120014 08-17 322N100230 02C-15 334N120036 07C-5 362N100502B 02E-10 388N120073A 07B-1
125N120015 08-16 322N100230 02E-19 334N120036 07D-5 362N100503B 02E-3 388N120095 02F-4
128S1173 08-13 322N100310A 02D-1 334N3619 04B-7 362N120031B 02C-13 388N1234 07B-8
133Y100031A 02D-7 322SB051 07C-2 334N3677 02E-2 363N100689 07F-8 392N0009A 02D-14
134S0058A 02D-4 322SB051 07D-3 334Y100152 04B-8 363N100811 07C-8 398N120004A 02A-1
136N0377 10-1 322SB052 04B-2 334Y120016A 07F-5 363N101037C 02D-3 405N102614 01B-1
136N0427 10-2 322SB052 07C-3 334Y120017A 02E-1 363N101042B 02C-4 405N120380A 01A-2
136N0450 10-3 322SB052 07D-2 337N0070A 07B-11 363N101050A 02E-6 405N120381 01A-3
136Y103125 10-4 322SB056 04A-10 337N0071B 07B-14 363N101051B 02D-16 407N120002C 03-2
136Y103126A 10-5 322SP211 07B-7 338N100132B 02F-1 363N120039D 02C-5 602Y100002 07F-11
136Y103127B 10-6 322SY097 02C-14 338N100132B 04A-16 363Y100351C 07A-1 603Y120014 03-4
136Y103129C 10-7 322SY165 02B-3 338N120051A 02F-11 364Y100039B 07A-2 801Y120001 02D-17
136Y103132B 10-8 322SY165 02F-2 340N100312 01A-6 367N100097A 01B-9 812Y120059 02C-6
136Y103134A 10-9 322SY165 04A-9 341N100237 02A-9 369N100141A 08-11 815Y100060 06-3
136Y120455D 10-10 323N100076B 07B-13 341N100237 02B-9 369N120041B 08-9 824Y120008 02F-13
136Y120456C 10-11 323N1266 07B-10 341N100458B 02A-4 370N100358A 02D-11 839Y100052 05-1
136Y120878A 10-12 327N100238A 04A-1 341N100625 04C-7 370N100359A 02D-5
136Y120879 10-13 327N100239 04A-2 341Y120031B 02D-15 371N100114A 02D-12
136Y8545B 10-14 327N100240 04A-4 345N101059B 01B-2 372S0048 02D-9
138S0139 08-15 327N100248A 07E-1 345N101441 06-1 372S0050A 02D-8
138S0195 08-2 327N100285 07F-1 345N120094C 01B-5 372S0053A 02D-10
138S0562 03-5 327N100286A 02F-5 345N120094D 01B-4 375N100012A 02D-13
138S0574 08-1 327N100286A 04A-5 345Y100185A 01B-3 386N100395 01B-10
146N0016B 04B-5 327N100289 02B-6 345Y100186A 01B-11 386N100407A 08-7
146S0028A 02C-18 327N100290 02B-11 347N100879 09-5 386N100408A 08-8
146S0028A 02F-10 327N100293 02A-8 350N101476 07D-8 386N100471 01A-4
146S0082 02C-1 327N100294A 02A-10 350N102065B 08-12 386N120083B 01B-7
146S0083 02E-5 327N100294A 02B-8 350N102765 01A-10 386N120085B 01B-8
146S0102 02A-5 327N100301 04C-3 350N102766 01A-1 387N0187B 04A-17
146S0102 02B-12 327N100467A 02A-7 350N102767 01A-3 387N100002A 07F-10
146S0102 02C-2 327N100471B 02B-10 350N102768 01A-8 387N100021B 07C-7
146S0102 02F-9 327N100472 04A-3 350N102769 01A-11 387N100023 02C-8
146S0102 04C-5 327N100473 02F-6 350N102770A 01A-9 387Y0019B 04B-6
146S0102 07B-5 327N100619B 07B-3 350N120151D 01A-12 388N100526 07F-9
304S0067 09-3 327N120011D 04C-2 352N100336 08-6 388N100527 07C-1
306SF004016 09-4 327N120012C 04C-4 356N103587A 07F-3 388N100527 07D-1
308S0565 07D-9 327N120013E 07B-2 356N103591B 07F-7 388N100530A 04A-6
308S2780516 09-6 327N120016C 02F-12 356N106009 02B-7 388N100530A 04A-7

SP-30
13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
l
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
● サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されている記号に読
替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意されている。 The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for converting
l
{SP:13_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the service manual.
{SP:13_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}
2. ねじ類 2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described.
l
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.

SP-31
13
参考情報参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information 記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
BR3x6 308S0401 鋼鋼
ばね座金 + みがき丸座金 TP3x6 308S0414 亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク
BR3x10 308S0403 座金組込み
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク六角頭 TP ネジロメート
十字穴付六角ボルト
BR3x12 308S0404 ロメート Cross recessed 色：うすい白色
Cross recessed TP4x8 308S0424
色：うすい白色 hexagon head TP Steel
BR3x32 308S0432 hexagon head
Steel screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
screw with spring
BR4x8 308S0406 Zinc plating/White trivalent TP4x12 308S0426 chromating
and plain washers
chromating Color: Light white
BR4x25 308S0411 Color: Light white 六角穴付き止めネジ鋼
鋼 WP3x4 303S0102 （W ポイント）亜鉛メッキ + リン酸塩処理
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク Hexagon socket Steel
六角頭デルタイトネロメート WP4x4 303S0107 head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
ジ色：うすい白色 (double -point) treatment
DT3x6 306S0101
Hexagon head Steel 鋼
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent 低頭六角穴付き亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価クロ
chromating TP3x6 低頭 TP ネジメート
308S0653
Color: Light white Thin head Hexagonal recessed Steel
ステンレス TP3x6 thin head TP screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
十字穴付なべ小ねじ chromating
不動態化処理
*N4x8 301S2000408 Cross recessed pan
Stainless steel
head screw
Passive state treatment
鋼
六角頭樹脂用タッピ
PS3x6 306S0151 亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価クロ
ングねじ
メート
Hexagon head
Steel
tapping screw for
PS3x8 306S0152 Zinc plating/White trivalent
plastic
chromating
ステンレス
六角ボルト
不動態化処理
*R8x20 304S1000820 Hexagon head
Stainless steel
screw
鋼
トラスねじ
黒色 3 価クロメート
T2x5 301S3750205 Cross recessed
Steel
truss head screw
Black trivalent chromating

SP-32
13
3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
*E3 315S3360030
ステンレス
*E4 315S3360040
E 形止め輪不動態化処理
E ring Stainless steel
*E6 315S3360060
*E8 315S3360080
KL リング
KL6 315S0051
K-CL ring
*SW4 309S0220004 ステンレス

ばね座金不動態化処理
Spring washer Stainless steel
*SW8 309S0220008 Passive state treatment
*W4 309S0120004 ステンレス

平座金不動態化処理
Plain washer Stainless steel
*W8 309S0110008 Passive state treatment
ステンレス
六角ナット不動態化処理
*Na8 305S1110008
Hexagon nut Stainless steel

SP-33
13
4. 配線用部品
4. Wiring Parts
参考情報参考情報
Reference information Reference information
記号部品コード記号部品コード
Symbol Parts code 概略外形寸法など（mm） Symbol Parts code 概略外形寸法など（mm）
形状部品名称形状部品名称
Approx. external Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
NK-4N 316S1006 21x7x10 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ
NK-5N 316S1007 22x9x10 (WxHxD)
スペーサ Code clamp
CS-12C 347S0913 10x16x10 (WxHxD)
Spacer NK-6N 316S1008 24x11x10 (WxHxD)
RLMS 1V0 316S1273 13x10x5 (WxHxD)

Code clamp
EDS-0607U 316S2027 14x9x4 (WxHxD) RLMS 2V0 316S1274 17x13x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
EDS-1 316S1121 20x10x4 (WxHxD) コードクランプ

コードクランプ RLWC 3SV0 316S1277 24x27x6 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
Code clamp
EDS-2 316S1122 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
T-18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)

T-30R 316S1002 Cable tie 152x3.5 (LxW)
EDS-17L 318S1037 55x26x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
クランプ
KGCP-08-0 316S0476 10x19x10 (WxHxD)
clamp

SP-34
13
5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table

Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used
in this Service Manual.
■ ねじ類 ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類 ■ 配線用部品

Screws Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Wiring Parts
部品コード記号部品コード記号部品コード記号
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000408 *N4x8 305S1110008 *Na8 316S0476 KGCP -08-0
301S3750205 T2x5 309S0110008 *W8 316S1006 NK-4N
303S0102 WP3x4 309S0120004 *W4 316S1007 NK-5N
303S0107 WP4x4 309S0220004 *SW4 316S1008 NK-6N
304S1000820 *R8x20 309S0220008 *SW8 316S1121 EDS-1
306S0101 DT3x6 315S0051 KL6 316S1122 EDS-2
306S0151 PS3x6 315S3360030 *E3 316S1273 RLMS 1V0
306S0152 PS3x8 315S3360040 *E4 316S1274 RLMS 1V0
308S0401 BR3x6 315S3360060 *E6 316S2027 EDS-0607U
308S0403 BR3x10 315S3360080 *E8 318S1037 EDS-17L
308S0404 BR3x12 318S1164 LAMS-05
308S0406 BR4x8
308S0411 BR4x25
308S0414 TP3x6
308S0424 TP4x8
308S0426 TP4x12
308S0431 BR3x22
308S0432 BR3x32
低頭 TP3x6
308S0653
Thin head TP3x6

SP-35
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Preventive Maintenance (PM)

PM-1
1. How to Use
the Preventive Maintenance Section
The preventive maintenance programs are based on the machine usage interval or the
process count. Perform the specified preventive maintenance programs at the predefined
intervals or when the predefined process count is reached.
Since the maintenance programs differ depending on the respective intervals, they should be
performed according to the Program List.
The Preventive Maintenance Program List and the specified maintenance programs are
listed below:
{PM:1.1_Preventive Maintenance Program List}
{PM:1.2_Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for
1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is
Reached}
{PM:1.3_Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for
2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached}
REFERENCE
The process counts are based on a daily process count of 20 and annual operating days of
300.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual PM-1

PM-2
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List
u INSTRUCTION u
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety,
ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned
states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
Periodic
Reference Time
Maintenance program 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y replacement Remarks
section requirements
parts
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
2.1 Backing Up the Log ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
2.2 Checking the Error Log ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
4. Pulling Out the Machine ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
5. Removing the Covers
5.1 Removing the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years) ¦ - ¦ - ¦
5.2 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Years) - ¦ - ¦ -
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch - ¦ - ¦ -
7. Erasure Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
7.2 Cleaning the Filter ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
*: Replace the filter when a process count of 12,000 is
7.3 Replacing the Filter * ¦ * ¦ * Filter reached (usage equivalent to 2 Years) regardless of
duration of use.
7.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate - ¦ - ¦ -
8. Cassette Set Unit
8.1 Cleaning the Roller (Small) - ¦ - ¦ -
8.2 Cleaning the Suction Cups - ¦ - ¦ -
8.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers - ¦ - ¦ -
8.4 Cleaning the Shutter - ¦ - ¦ -
8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦

PM-3
Periodic
Reference Time
Maintenance program 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y replacement Remarks
parts
9. Light-Collecting Guide
9.1 Removing the Bottom Cover - ¦ - ¦ -
9.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly - ¦ - ¦ -
9.3 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit - ¦ - ¦ -
9.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide - ¦ - ¦ -
9.5 Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Unit - ¦ - ¦ -
9.6 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly - ¦ - ¦ -
9.7 Reinstalling the Bottom Cover - ¦ - ¦ -
10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch - ¦ - ¦ -
11. Greasing Up
11.1 Greasing Up the Movable Guide - ¦ - ¦ - Molykote (EM-30L)
12. Reinstalling the Covers and Cleaning the Covers
12.1 Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years) ¦ - ¦ - ¦
12.2 Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years) - ¦ - ¦ -
12.3 Cleaning the Covers ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
13. Securing the Machine ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
14. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
15. Checking the Image/Conveyance ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
16. Confirming the S Value ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
17. Checking the Error Log ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ ¦

PM-4
1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Reference Time
Periodic
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a section requirements
parts
Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached 12. Reinstalling the Covers and Cleaning the Covers
Reinstalling the Covers
u INSTRUCTION u 12.1
(1st/3rd/5th Years)
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
12.3 Cleaning the Covers
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are 13. Securing the Machine
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored Checking for
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify 14.
Improper Protective Grounding
Checking the
15.
Periodic Image/Conveyance
Reference Time
Maintenance program replacement Remarks 16. Confirming the S Value
parts
17. Checking the Error Log
2.1 Backing Up the Log l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 1 year, 3 years and
2.2 Checking the Error Log 5 years, or when a process counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 is reached
Checking the Erasure Lamp Reference
2.3 Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
Lighting Time section
Checking 7.3 Filter 603Y120014 1 -

3.
the Image/Conveyance
4. Pulling Out the Machine
5. Removing the Covers
Removing the Covers
5.1
(1st/3rd/5th Years)
7. Erasure Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
7.2 Cleaning the Filter
*: Replace the filter
when a process
count of 12,000 is
7.3 Replacing the Filter Filter reached (usage
equivalent to 2
Years) regardless
of duration of use.
8. Cassette Set Unit
8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit

PM-5
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Reference Time
Periodic
Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process section requirements
parts
Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached 8. Cassette Set Unit
u INSTRUCTION u 8.1 Cleaning the Roller (Small)

Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional 8.2 Cleaning the Suction Cups
8.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored 8.4 Cleaning the Shutter
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
9. Light-Collecting Guide
Periodic 9.1 Removing the Bottom Cover
Reference Time
section requirements Removing the Post-Reading
parts 9.2
Conveyor Guide Assembly
Removing
2.1 Backing Up the Log 9.3
the Light-Collecting Unit
2.2 Checking the Error Log Cleaning
9.4
Checking the Erasure Lamp the Light-Collecting Guide
2.3
Lighting Time Reinstalling
9.5
Checking the Light-Collecting Unit
3.
the Image/Conveyance Reinstalling the Post-Reading
9.6
4. Pulling Out the Machine Conveyance Guide Assembly
5. Removing the Covers 9.7 Reinstalling the Bottom Cover
Removing the Covers Turning ON

5.2 10.
(2nd/4th Years) the High-Voltage Switch
Turning Off 11. Greasing Up

6.
the High-Voltage Switch
Greasing Up
11.1 Molykote (EM-30L)
7. Erasure Unit the Movable Guide
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit 12. Reinstalling the Covers and Cleaning the Covers
7.3 Replacing the Filter Filter Reinstalling the Covers

12.2
(2nd/4th Years)
7.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
12.3 Cleaning the Covers
13. Securing the Machine
Checking for
14.
Improper Protective Grounding
Checking
15.
the Image/Conveyance

PM-6
Periodic
Reference Time
parts
16. Confirming the S Value
17. Checking the Error Log
l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 2 years and 4
years, or when a process counts of 12,000 or 24,000 is reached
Reference
Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
section
7.3 Filter 603Y120014 1 -

PM-7
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures (3) Click on to select the location where the data is to be backed up. After
selection, click on [OK]. Verify the location for backup and click on [OK].
2.1 Backing Up the Log #1
REFERENCE
The path for the RU PC-TOOL is as follows:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe
(2) Select “LOG ALL” from the BACKUP items, and click on [EXECUTE].
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#2
RU IP ADDR
ERROR LOG
CONFIGURATION
BACKUP RESTORE
TRACE LOGS
HISTORY LOG
ALL RUs SETTING
LOG ALL
SCN ALL DATA
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
SCN OPTICAL DATA
#3
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#1
"LOG ALL"
#2
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB602001.ai
#4
→ The window opens for prompting to select the location for backing up the data.
FRRB602002.ai
→ Upon completion of the backup, the Complete window appears.

(4) Click on [OK].
FRRB602003.ai
→ The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.

PM-8
2.2 Checking the Error Log
(1) Click on [ERROR DB].
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB602004.ai
→ The ERROR-DB window opens.
(2) Click on [UPDATE].
FRRB602005.ai
(3) Select the log, and check to make sure that the error log is not abnormal.
#1
#2
FRRB602006.ai
(4) Click on .
→ The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.

PM-9
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time (2) Click on the [LAMP] tab, and confirm the total count for the erasure lamp lighting.
After the confirmation, click on [CANCEL].
(1) Click on [EDIT HISTORY].
→ The EDIT HISTORY window opens. #1
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
#2
FRRB602007.ai
#3
FRRB602008.ai
→ The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.

PM-10
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance

(1) Check the image/conveyance.

PM-11
4. Pulling Out the Machine

(1) Power OFF the RU.
(2) Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable.
(3) Pull out the machine to the working space.

PM-12
5. Removing the Covers 6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch

(1) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1).
5.1 Removing the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)
(1) Remove the right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
5.2 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Years)

(1) Remove the following covers.
- Back cover
- Top cover
- Front-top cover
{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Remove the board box cover.


PM-13
7. Erasure Unit 7.2 Cleaning the Filter
u INSTRUCTION u
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit Replace the filter at the time of installation, or when a process counts of 12,000 is reached
since last replacement.
(1) Remove the erasure unit. {MC:7.3_Replacing the Filter}
(1) Remove the reflection plate.
(2) Clean the filter with a moistened cloth.
(3) Reinstall the reflection plate.


PM-14
7.3 Replacing the Filter 7.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
(1) Remove the reflection plate. (1) Remove the reflection plate.
{MC:6.2_Reflection Plate} {MC:6.2_Reflection Plate}
(2) Clean the filter with a moistened cloth. (2) Clean the reflection plate with a moistened cloth.


u NOTE u
Clean the reflection plate before reinstalling it.

PM-15
8. Cassette Set Unit (2) Clean the roller (small) with a moistened cloth.
8.1 Cleaning the Roller (Small)

(1) Manually rotate the gear of the motor, and move the IP suction arm to the front.
8.2 Cleaning the Suction Cups

(1) Clean the suction cups with a moistened cloth.

PM-16
8.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (3) Reinstall the rubber rollers (A, B).
(1) Remove the rubber rollers (A, B).
(4) Clean the rubber rollers (A, B) with a moistened cloth.
(2) Clean the rubber rollers (C, D) with a moistened cloth.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Clean the rubber rollers (C, D) while rotating the gear of the left-hand side.
- When cleaning the rubber rollers (C, D), as you need to put your hand deep into the
machine, pay attention not to hurt yourself by the tip of the bracket.

PM-17
8.4 Cleaning the Shutter 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
(1) Clean the shutter with a vacuum cleaner. (1) Reinstalling the erasure unit

PM-18
9. Light-Collecting Guide 9.4 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide
CAUTIONS
9.1 Removing the Bottom Cover
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide even when you are
(1) Remove the bottom cover. wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry sheet of lens cleaning paper.
Otherwise, the guide might get damaged.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.
9.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly

u INSTRUCTION u
(1) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly. When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
(1) Clean the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide.
9.3 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit u INSTRUCTIONS u

- Use lens cleaning paper to clean the light-collecting surface.
(1) Remove the light-collecting unit. - Use four-fold two plies of the lens cleaning paper and moisten with dehydrated ethanol.
{MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Unit} - Use new sheets of the lens cleaning paper and clean until the paper does not catch
smears.
- Clean in one direction at a constant rate.

PM-19
9.5 Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Unit
(1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
9.6 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly

(1) Reinstall the post-reading conveyance guide assembly.
9.7 Reinstalling the Bottom Cover


PM-20
10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch 12. Reinstalling the Covers and
(1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1). Cleaning the Covers
REFERENCE
The error 285 occurs if the machine is started with the high-voltage switch kept OFF.
12.1 Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)
(1) Reinstall the right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
12.2 Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)

(1) Reinstall the board box cover.
(2) Remove the following covers.

- Top cover
- Front-top cover
- Operation panel cover assembly
{MC:3.1_Cover}
11. Greasing Up 12.3 Cleaning the Covers

(1) Cleaning the covers.
11.1 Greasing Up the Movable Guide
(1) Apply grease (Molykote: EM-30L) to the shaft.
13. Securing the Machine
(1) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable.
(2) Move the machine to its retained position.

(1)
(3) Lower the adjustable feet and fix the machine.
PRTM010611001.ai

PM-21
14. Checking for Improper Protective 16. Confirming the S Value

Grounding (1) Confirm the S value.
(1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire connections
are established in the same manner as for installation.
REFERENCE
Check the additional protecting ground wire only when the machine is installed in the
patient environment.
(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are connected in
the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
15. Checking the Image/Conveyance 17. Checking the Error Log

(1) Check the image/conveyance. (1) Check the error log.
{IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks} {PM:2.2_Checking the Error Log}
(2) Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(3) Turn OFF the power of Console.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.

PM-22
BLANK PAGE

PM-23
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Installation (IN)

IN-1
1. Specifications of the Machine

Refer to the "Product Specifications" for specifications of the machine.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual IN-1

IN-2
2. Installation Work Flowchart

n Workflow for First-Time Installation
START A
3. Preparation for Installation 8. Installing the RU PC-TOOL
3.2 Unloading 9. Installing the RU Software
3.3 Transfer
10. Starting Up the RU
3.4 Temporary Placement
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 11. Changing the RU and FTP Server Settings
4. Installation Procedures
12. Image/Conveyance Checks
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member

12.1 Preparations
5. Connecting the Cables 12.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
5.1 Checking the Power Cable 13. Confirming the S Value
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable

13.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST
6. Final Placement 13.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR
6.1 Securing the Machine 14. Powering OFF the Console/RU
6.2 Connecting and Retaining the Power Cable

15. Cleaning the Console/RU
7. Installing the Console
END

IN-3
3. Preparation for Installation 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment
n Additional Protective Grounding

3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation If the RU is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the
nonmedically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in "Getting Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used room"
Started" and "3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements." Preinstallation procedures should be are given below.
performed beforehand for necessary construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning
system installation. l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements tests, diagnosis, and monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient's body. It excludes the space traveled by the
Avoid the following installation sites: patient to reach the medically-used room.
- Places where the temperature changes drastically.
- Places near heat sources such as heaters. l Medically-Used Room
- Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
- Places where corrosive gas may be generated. terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
- Dusty places. the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock. used room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room. Generally, a portion of the
- Places that are exposed to direct sunlight. medically-used room is the patient environment.
- Places that are exposed to X-rays while the machine is processing. l Non-Medically Used Room
Make sure that the machine will never be exposed to direct and scattered X-rays while the
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
machine is processing.
The size and position of the X-ray shields should be such that the machine is completely
shielded to avoid exposure of direct and scattered X-rays to the machine.
3.1.3 Precautions for System Connection (Outside Japan)
- Install this device in the place that a patient dose not touch.
l When installed in the patient environment "Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations shall comply
In the room where the machine is to be installed, the hospital-grade grounding terminal and
with the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
outlet should be provided.
Everyone who connects additional equipment configures a medical system, and is therefore
The installation place should be within reach of the cable of the patient environment support
responsible that the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and
cable kit from the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet.
IEC60601-1:2005 chapter 16.
l When installed in other than the patient environment If in doubt consult with the your local technical service representative."
Make sure that persons other than routine operators of the machine will not touch the
machine inadvertently.

IN-4
3.2 Unloading
CAUTION
- When unloading/moving the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do
so.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
The operation procedures depend on the packing format. Refer to the corresponding
procedures for unloading.
{IN:3.2.1_Unloading (Only in USA)}
{IN:3.2.2_Unloading (Outside Japan and USA)}

IN-5
3.2.1 Unloading (Only in USA) (3) Remove the cardboard and pull out the accessory bag.
#1 Remove the cardboard.
(1) Unload the machine together with the pallet from the truck. #2 Pull out the accessory bag.
(2) Cut off the PP band.

IN-6
(4) Remove the buffer material. (6) Pull out the machine.
(5) Cut the bottom of the plastic cover.

IN-7
3.2.2 Unloading (Outside Japan and USA) (3) Remove the cardboard and pull out the accessory bag.
#1 Remove the crate.
(1) Unload the machine together with the pallet from the truck. #2 Pull out the accessory bag.
(2) Remove the screws on the lower part of the side face of the crate.

IN-8
(4) Remove the buffer material. (6) Pull out the machine.
(5) Cut the bottom of the plastic cover.

IN-9
3.3 Transfer 3.4 Temporary Placement
(1) Remove the plastic cover.
CAUTION
u INSTRUCTION u
If moving the machine with a caster, move the machine as slowly as possible and
make sure not to have impact on the machine when passing through a stair. Leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room during the winter time.
If the cover is removed immediately after the machine is carried into the room,
condensation may result on the machine.
(1) Transfer the machine into the installation place.
u NOTE u (2) Secure a space required for installation procedures and temporarily fix the
The caster is recommended to have the following requirements. machine with the adjustable feet.
- The caster should have a load capacity more than 150kgf, and is stable and not shaky.
- Tabletop size: bigger than W560 x D540 x H15 (mm) (W22.0 x D21.3 x H0.6 (inch)).

IN-10
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied n Optional Items
Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks
n Machine Main Body IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E Power cable 1 For use in Great Britain
Abbreviated product name Destination Qty. Remarks For use in European

countries other than
CR IR 392 RU2 M PNTM = : E Outside USA and Japan 1 Made in China
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E Power cable 1 the Great Britain, and
for other overseas
n Accessories countries
Check Item Qty. Remarks For retaining the
IR 392 TABLE FIX KIT = #(E) Anti-Drop Retainer kit 1
CD-R (machine-specific data) 1 Machine-specific data CD-R machine
CD-ROM
1 For installation
(application software) ■ Available Item
CD (Reference Guide) 1 For operation Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks
Operation Manual 1 -
IR 392 ADD STAND FOR LCD = #(E) Additional Stand for LCD 1
Quick Guide 1 -
IR 392 STAND WAGON = #(E) Stand Wagon 1
1 8A (137S1459)
IR 391 CASSETTE RACK = #(E) Cassette rack 1
1 1A (137S1417)
1 1.6A (137S1419) IR 355 CASSETTE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1
Fuses (spare)
1 2A (137S1420) IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm 1
1 3.2A (137S1421) Wall-retaining fitting
IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) 1
1 5A (137S1423) (long type)
Chinese RoHS information sheet 1 Only for China IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1
1 138S0195 IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1 For Europe
Ferrite Core
1 138S0574 IR 392 SUPPORT BAR FOR LC = #(E) Support Bar for LC 1
Dummy cassette for Enclosed to
IR DUMMY CASSETTE FOR MBL #(E) 1
mobile the Operation Manual

IN-11
4. Installation Procedures
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member

(1) Remove the transportation protective member.
REFERENCE
No transportation protective member is put inside the machine.

IN-12
5. Connecting the Cables (1) Connect the power cable to the machine, and set the main power switch to the
ON position.
(2) Measure the resistance value of the power cable.
5.1 Checking the Power Cable (Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Resistance value 100 kΩ~ ∞ ∞
WARNING
- Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is unplugged
from the outlet.
- If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see the following
procedures.
{IN:Appendix 1._Installing in the Patient Environment}
- If the power cable is to be locally prepared, be sure to use a power cable that
complies with the requirements stated below.
- Using the cable not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an electric
(3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power cable and the
shock or a fire.
bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there is continuity.
<For the U.S. and Canada>
UL-listed detachable power cable
Hospital Grade plug
Cable wire diameter : 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
Rated current: Minimum 6.25 A
Cable type: SJT
Cable length: 3 m or shorter
(for the U.S. only)
- Should be equipped with the GROUND RELIABILITY LABEL conforming to the
UL60601-1.
- UL-Iisted detachable power supply cable
- Hospital Grade plug
(for Canada only)
- Plug: If molded on type-hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
hospital grade disassemble type complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
- Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2, No.21. (4) Set the main power switch to the OFF position after completion of the
<For Europe> measurement.
Cable certified by a country in which the machine is to be installed
Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Rated current: 5A
Cable type: H05VV-F
Cable length: 3 m or shorter
<For Japan>
Do not use the power cable other than the one attached with the machine.

IN-13
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable (2) Connect the I/F cable.
CAUTION
A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector. The type of
cable compatible with this machine is an IEC950/UL1950-listed cable only.
u NOTE u
For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more should be used.
(1) Install the ferrite cores.

#1 Install the ferrite core A (138S0195). (3) Connect the I/F cable to the switching hub.
#2 Install the ferrite core B (138S0574).
#1 #2 CAUTION
Only devices evaluated to IEC/UL60950-1 can be used.
PRTM010705001.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
Install the ferrite core A by winding the cable one time in a position of 60 mm away from
the I/F cable connector base.
PRTM010705009.ai

IN-14
6. Final Placement 6.1 Securing the Machine
For final placement of the machine, check the requests of the user, and observe the (1) Secure the machine at the installation position.
procedures described below to secure the machine and cables in place.
6.2 Connecting and Retaining the Power Cable
l Retaining the machine with the anti-drop retainer;
Follow the procedures below when the machine is to be retained with the anti-drop retainer WARNING
(option).
If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see the following
{IN: Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer}
procedures.
{IN:Appendix 1_Installing in the Patient Environment}
CAUTION
Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded.
(1) Plug the power cable into the outlet.

IN-15
7. Installing the Console

(1) Install the Console.

IN-16
8. Installing the RU PC-TOOL (4) Select “Change User Account Control settings”.
u NOTE u #1
- If the OS of the Console is Windows Vista or Windows 7, turn off the UAC (User Account
Control) function before installation.
- After the installation, be sure to turn back on the UAC (User Account Control).
(1) Turn ON the power of the Console.
(2) Select “Control Panel” from the Windows start menu.

PRIT07050015.ai
→ The “User Account Control Settings” window opens.
(5) Lower the slide bar to the bottom and click “OK”.
#2
#1 #1
PRIT07080001.ai
→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.

#2
(3) Click “User Accounts”.
PRIT07050016.ai
→ The system returns to the “User Accounts” window.
(6) Click “← (retune)”.
#1 #1
PRIT07050014.ai
→ The “User Accounts” window opens. PRIT07050017.ai
→ The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window.

IN-17
(7) Click “Windows Firewall”. (9) Make sure that “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” are displayed in the “Allowed
programs and features:” column and that their boxes are checked.
If they are not checked, check them. If “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” are not
displayed, click on [Allow another program...] and add “FTP Server” and “inetinfo”.
Upon completion of the addition, make sure that their boxes are checked.
#1
#1
PRIT07050018.ai PRIT07050020.ai
→ The “Windows Firewall” window opens. REFERENCE

The “FTP Server” and “inetinfo” paths are as follows:
(8) Select “Allow a program or featurethrough Windows Firewall”. C:\Windows\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe
#1 C:\Windows\SYSTEM32\inetsrv\inetinfo.exe
(10) Click “OK” if settings under “Allowed programs and features” are changed; or,
click “← (Back)” if not.
#1
PRIT07050019.ai
→ The “Allowed program” window opens.
PRIT07050021.ai
→ The system returns to the “Windows Firewall” window.
(11) Close the “Windows Firewall” window.
(12) Restart the Console.
(13) Close all the windows which are open.

→ The startup window appears.

IN-18
(15) Confirm the startup window appearing on the Console, and check that the RU PC- (18) Select “Change User Account Control settings”.
TOOL has been installed.
l When the [INSTALL] button is active:

#1
→ The RU PC-TOOL is not installed. Install the RU PC-TOOL according to the procedures
below.
{IN:8.1_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
l When the [INSTALL] button is not active:

→ The RU PC-TOOL is installed. As the version may be not up to date, once uninstall the
RU PC-TOOL, and again install it.
{IN:8.2_Uninstalling the RU PC-TOOL} PRIT07050015.ai
(16) Select “Control Panel” from the Windows start menu. → The “User Account Control Settings” window opens.
#2 #1
#1
#2
PRIT07080001.ai

(17) Click “User Accounts”. PRIT07050016.ai
(20) Close the “User Account Control Settings” window.
#1
PRIT07050014.ai
→ The “User Accounts” window opens.

IN-19
8.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL (4) Click on [NEXT].

If the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window does not automatically appear, click on “Start” and “My
computer (Computer)”, and the double-click on the RU-APL CD-ROM icon.
(2) Click on [INSTALL].
#1
PRIT07050024.ai
#1 (5) Click on [Install].
PRIT07050022.ai
(3) Select “For FTP Server” and click on [SET].

#1
PRIT07050025.ai
→ Installation starts.
#1
u NOTE u
When the windows of “Info Host Server”, “Bmp Server” or the like appear during the
#2 installation, click on [OK] for all items and close the windows.
As they sometimes appear behind other windows, minimize the other windows in such a
PRIT07050023.ai
case, and close the windows of “Info Host Server”, “Bmp Server” or the like.
→ Installation starts.

IN-20
#1
PRIT07050026.ai

(9) As the “Windows Security Alert” window appears, click on [Unblock].

IN-21
8.2 Uninstalling the RU PC-TOOL (4) Select “Change User Account Control settings”.
u NOTE u
#1
- If the OS of the Console is Windows Vista or Windows 7, turn off the UAC (User Account
Control) function before installation.
- After the installation, be sure to turn back on the UAC (User Account Control).
(1) Turn ON the power of the Console.
(2) Select “Control Panel” from the Windows start menu.

PRIT07050015.ai
→ The “User Account Control Settings” window opens.
#2
#1 #1
PRIT07080001.ai
(3) Click “User Accounts”. #2
PRIT07050016.ai
(6) Close the “User Account Control Settings” window.

#1
If the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window does not automatically appear, click on “Start” and “My
computer (Computer)”, and the double-click on the RU-APL CD-ROM icon.
PRIT07050014.ai
→ The “User Accounts” window opens.

IN-22
(9) Click on [UNINSTALL]. (12) Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.
#1
#1
PRIT07050033.ai
(13) Press a key in accordance with the instruction on the screen.

PRIT07050030.ai → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
(14) Install the RU PC-TOOL according to the following procedures.
{IN:8.1_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
#1
PRIT07050031.ai
#1
PRIT07050032.ai

IN-23
9. Installing the RU Software (5) Enter the "y" and press the [Enter] key.
→ Message files for CR Console/Console Advance are copied to the Console.
u INSTRUCTION u
Exit the Console application in advance.
(3) Execute "Change_MSG" inside the RU-APL CD-ROM.

PRT040709004.ai

(8) Install the RU software.
{MU:1.11_INSTALL}
u NOTE u
- Install the software under the default settings without changing the RU NAME and the
RU IP address in this procedure.
- If the default RU NAME and IP address are already used in another machine in the
network, once change the settings of the other machine, and install the RU software.
- If the default RU NAME and IP address are already used in the same network and
cannot be changed, connect the RU directly with the Console via the LAN cable, change
the RU NAME and the IP address, and then connect to the network.
→ The following window opens. PRT040709001.ai The default settings are as follows:
PRT040709002.ai
(4) Enter the "1" and press the [Enter] key.

→ The confirmation window opens.
(10) Shut down the Console and the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
PRT040709003.ai

IN-24
10. Starting Up the RU 11. Changing the RU and FTP Server Settings
(1) Start up the Console. Take the following procedures to change the RU NAME, the RU IP address, the FTP server
IP address registered in RU and the configuration settings.
(3) Check that “onL” appears on the RU operation panel.

n Changing the RU NAME and the RU IP Address
{MU: Appendix.1_Procedures for Changing the RU IP Address}
(4) Check to make sure that images can be correctly read in the Console.
n Changing the FTP Server IP Address Registered in RU

{MU: Appendix.2_Procedures for Changing the IP Address of the FTP Server
Registered in RU}
n Changing the Configuration


IN-25
12. Image/Conveyance Checks (4) Perform IP exposure.
u NOTE u
Be sure to make exposure under the following X-ray tube voltage conditions. Otherwise,
12.1 Preparations the image cannot be correctly checked.
- For tungsten X-ray tube: 80 kVp
u NOTE u - For molybdenum X-ray tube: 25 kVp
For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the
hospital should be employed. u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST and HR) used at the
(1) Check that the RU is connected to the Console. user’s site with the following doses.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the
(2) Make sure that an IP to be used does not include important image data. second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
(3) Press the erasure button on the operation panel to erase the IP.
l When the IP type ST
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kVp
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec.
l When the IP type HR

- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 3.6 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size
l When the IP type HR is to be exposed with the molybdenum X-ray tube

- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 kVp
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.53 sec.

IN-26
12.2 Image/Conveyance Checks (3) Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the
image displayed on the image monitor.
(1) Read the IP prepared in “12.1 Preparations".
u CHECK u
u INSTRUCTION u There should be no nonuniformity in the main scan direction.
Use the Console menu of “QC/TEST” and “Image format".
If any nonuniformity is observed, compare the films output from the two IPs of the same
(2) Output an image to the film. size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine or the X-ray
tube.
REFERENCE
If the printer is not used at the customer’s site, skip this procedure and go to procedure l If nonuniformity is observed in same direction on two films:
(3).
IP in normal orientation IP in 180-degree upside-down

(first IP) orientation (second IP)
FRRB712001.ai
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
l If positions of nonuniformity vary:
IP in normal orientation IP in 180-degree upside-down

(first IP) orientation (second IP)
FRRB712002.ai
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

IN-27
(4) Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 4 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the center of the image frame of the output film.
u NOTE u
- The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
- Adjust the white blank portion if necessary, according to the following procedures.
{MU:4.3 [6-4-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
{MU:4.3 [6-4-3]_Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel)}

IN-28
13. Confirming the S Value (2) Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the
radiation dose is 1 mR.
u NOTE u
13.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST
If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at
Read the IP exposed to 1 mR of radiation during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of
minutes after an X-ray exposure. Check the displayed S value and the “S value converted to 1 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
exposure to 1 mR” obtained from the average dose value are within the control limits. - Distance _________ cm
- Tube voltage _________ kVp
REFERENCE - Tube current _________ mA
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below: - Time _________ sec
- S value control limits for user adjustments
Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300
REFERENCE
Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133
If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments
values and make fine adjustments:
Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260
Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after
service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician
adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
(1) Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is
approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the
cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
(3) Under the exposure conditions confirmed in the procedure (2), measure the
radiation dose five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
(4) Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in the
procedure (3) in the "FCR S Value Control Table."

IN-29
(5) Make sure that an IP to be used does not include important image data. (9) Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S
value printed on the film or displayed on the Console screen) and the average
u NOTE u radiation dose value obtained in procedure (3).
Use an IP of 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) or 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm).
--- Example ---
Displayed S value: 200
(6) Erase the IP.
Average radiation dose value obtained in procedure (3): 1.04
(7) Expose the IP to the X-ray radiation under the exposure conditions confirmed in Film output
the procedure (2).
(8) Read the IP exposed in the procedure (7) during a 1-minute period between 10
and 11 minutes after the exposure.
S value printed on film
u INSTRUCTION u
Use the Console menu of “QC/TEST” and “Image format”.
Console screen
S value displayed on screen

PRTM010705007.ai
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value

= 200 x 1.04
= 208
(10) Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in the
procedure (9), is within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation,"

which was determined in the procedure (9), is
between the upper and lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the “S value converted to exposure to 1 mR” is not in a range from the lower limit to
the upper limit of the control limits, carry out the sensitivity correction and again confirm
the S value.
{MU:4.3[6-5-3-1]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)}

IN-30
13.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR (2) Set the tube voltage to 25 kVp. Set the target/filter to molybdenum/molybdenum.
Confirm the exposure conditions under which the IP radiation dose of 20 mR is
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 20 achieved.
mR of radiation with the molybdenum tube, during a 1-minute period between 10 and l Achieved IP radiation dose = Dosimeter reading x L /L'
2 2
11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, output the read image, and check that the S value
for 20 mR of radiation, which is determined from the displayed S value and average L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor
dose value, is within the control limits. L': Distance between the focus and the cassette top frame
REFERENCE
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- S value control limits for user adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.5 = 180
Lower limit: 120/1.5 = 80
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.3 = 156
Lower limit: 120/1.3 = 92
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time
after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service
technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
(1) Align the X-ray radiation field with the cassette size. Position the reference point
of the dosimeter sensor so that it coincides with the size of the cassette to be
used.
u NOTE u
If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 20 mR, leave the tube
voltage at 25 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a
radiation dose of 20 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
- Distance: cm - Tube voltage: kVp
- Tube current: mA - Time: sec
REFERENCE
If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
values and make fine adjustments:
- Distance (L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 55 cm
- Distance (L': Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 60 cm
- Tube voltage 80kVp
- Tube current 100mA
- Time 0.053sec

IN-31
(3) Under the exposure conditions confirmed in procedure (2), measure the radiation (9) Determine the "S value for 20 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the
dose five times and average the measured values. S value printed on the film or displayed on the Console screen) and the average
--- Example --- radiation dose value obtained in procedure (3).
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average ---Example ---
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value Displayed S value: 120
19.6 20.0 20.2 20.4 18.8 19.8 Average radiation dose value obtained in procedure (3): 19.8
(4) Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in Film Output
procedure (3) in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
(5) Make sure that an IP to be used does not include important image data.
u NOTE u
S value printed on film
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
(6) Erase the IP.
(7) Under the exposure conditions confirmed in procedure (2), expose a 18 cm x 24

Console screen
cm or 24 cm x 30 cm IP to X-ray radiation.
(8) Read the IP exposed in procedure (7) during a 1-minute period between 10 and
11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
"SINGLE" Console menus, and then output the read image.
S value displayed on screen

PRTM010705008.ai
S value for 20 mR of Displayed S Average radiation

= x / 20 (mR)
radiation value dose value
= 120 x 19.8 / 20
= 118.8
(10) Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in
procedure (9), is within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
92 < 118.8 < 156
Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation,"

which was determined in procedure (9), is between
the upper and lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in procedure (9), is
not between the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction
and then confirm the S value again.
{MU:4.3 [6-5-3-2]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)}

IN-32
14. Powering OFF the Console/RU 15. Cleaning the Console/RU

(1) Turn OFF the power of the Console. (1) Clean the monitor and covers of the Console with a dry cloth.
→ The RU power is turned OFF in turn. (2) Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth.
CAUTION
Ensure cloth is free of residual water and water dose not enter the device.

IN-33
BLANK PAGE

IN-34
BLANK PAGE

IN-35
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN-1
Appendix 1. Installing in Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective Grounding of the
Equipment and Clamp Locations
the Patient Environment INSTRUCTION
Operation procedures for installing the machine in the patient environment differ depending Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional
on whether the machine is to be installed within Japan or outside Japan. Refer to the protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country to which
corresponding procedures for operation. the equipment is to be installed.
1. Installing in the Patient Environment <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>

1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the patient connection of additional protective grounding.
environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. Refer to Medical 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move the
System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital grade earth
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible. terminal.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and isolated 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply from
supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures for additional the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
protective grounding” on the next page.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
facility construction.
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used room”
are given below.
Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used
room is equipotential to that in the other medically-used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Non-Medically Used Room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual Appx IN-1

Appx IN-2
Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Drop Retainer
the Anti-Drop Retainer (1) Remove the bottom cover.
1. Components
(2) Attach the attachment parts to the bottom cover.
REFERENCE
The attachment parts for the left-hand side and the right-hand side are the same.

#2 Attach the spacers.
#3 Attach the attachment parts.
#4 Tighten the screw.
No. Name Qty. Remarks

1 Anti-Drop retainer 2
2 Bottom plate 1
3 Screw 4
4 Tapping screw (4x16) 4
5 Spacer 4
Screw
6 4
(Cross recessed head double sems screw M5x16)

Appx IN-3
(4) Retain the bottom plate to the anchoring position. (6) Retain the machine with the screw.
REFERENCE
- Embed the Bottom plate with the protrusions of the bottom cover at the back of the
bottom plate.
- Out of eight screw holes on the base plate, four outer holes are spare ones.
(5) Install the machine while pushing the attachment parts against the protrusions of
the Bottom plate.
CAUTION
- When installing the machine to the Bottom plate, use care not to get your hands
pinched between the attachment parts and Bottom plate.
- When moving the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so.

Appx IN-4
Appendix 3. Assembling and Securing the Stand Wagon and Additional Stand for LCD
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not impact the stand wagon or additional stand for LCD while reading the image. Otherwise, image abnormality might result.
 List of operation item for installing the stand wagon and additional stand for LCD
Reference Stand wagon and
Operation item Only stand wagon
section additional stand for LCD
1. Components ¦ ¦
2. Assembling the Additional Stand for LCD - ¦
3. Installing the Optional Items for the Stand Wagon
3.1 Installing the Guide Bracket for Long Cassette ¦ ¦
4. Installing the Optional Items for the Additional Stand for LCD
4.1 Mounting the Arm - ¦
4.2 Installing the Base - ¦
4.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack and the Rack for Long Cassette - ¦
5. Applying the Seal - ¦
6. Fixing the Machine ¦ ¦
7. Securing the Additional Stand for LCD
7.1 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD to the Floor (Anchor Nut) - ¦
7.2 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Screw) - ¦
7.3 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Wall-Retaining Fitting
- ¦
(Long Type))
8. Securing the Stand Wagon
8.1 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Floor ¦ -
8.2 Fixing the Stand Wagon on the Wall ¦ -
8.3 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Additional Stand for LCD - ¦

Appx IN-5
1. Components  Stand Wagon (Option)
1 Main unit 1
 Stand Wagon
 Accessories 1
2 Bracket (for fixing to the floor) 2
3 Bracket (for fixing on the wall) 2
4 Spring washer (SW8) 2 For fixing the stand wagon
5 Plain washer (W8) 2 For fixing the stand wagon
6 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) 2 For fixing the stand wagon
7 Grip anchor 2 For fixing the stand wagon
8 Insulock 4
9 POM collar 4
10 POM washer (for M4) 4
Flat washer-faced pan-head screw
11 4
(4.8x45)
12 Screw (4x12) 12
 Accessories 2
13 Bracket (for fixing the machine) 2
14 Spacer 4
15 Hexagon screw 4 For fixing the machine
Screw (with plain washer and
16 4 For attaching the bracket
spring washer M5x16)

Appx IN-6
 Options for the Stand Wagon  Guide for Long Cassette
1 Guide 1
Guide bracket
2 1
(small/right front side)
Guide bracket
3 1
(small/left front side)
4 Guide bracket (large) 2
5 Packing 4
6 Truss tapping screw (M4x10) 8

Appx IN-7
 Additional Stand for LCD  Additional Stand for LCD (Option)
1 Main unit 1
2 Bracket (left-hand side) 1
3 Bracket (right-hand side) 1
 Accessories
Bracket for retaining an additional
4 2
stand for LCD (to a stand wagon)
2 For additional stand for LCD body
5 Spring washer (SW8)
4 For retaining the anchor
2 For additional stand for LCD body
6 Plain washer (W8)
4 For retaining the anchor
7 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) 4 For retaining the anchor
8 Grip anchor 4 For retaining the anchor
Cross recessed pan head tapping
9 4 For fixing to the wall
screw (4x40)
10 Washer (W4) 10
11 Stem band 4
12 Insulock 4
13 Insulock plate 4
14 NK clamp 12
15 Retaining band 1
16 Seal 1
17 Screw (T5x12) 6 Spare 2 pcs.
Flat washer-faced pan-head screw
18 10 For fixing to the wall
(4.8x45)
19 Cap nut (M5) 2 Spare
20 POM washer (for M5) 6
21 POM collar 4
Screw (with plain washer and
22 8
spring washer M5x12)

Appx IN-8
 Options for the Additional Stand for LCD  Arm
1 Arm 1
2 Bracket 1
Small pan-head W sems screw
3 5
(B4x12)
4 Small truss screw (T5x12) 9
5 Band retainer 5
6 Insulock 5
 Base
7 Coupling bracket 1
8 Base 1
 Cassette Rack
9 Cassette rack 1
10 POM washer (W6.6) 4
11 Seal 1
 Rack for Long Cassette

12 Rack for long cassette 1
 Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type)

13 Bracket 1
14 Bracket (for coupling) 1
Cross recessed pan head tapping
15 10
screw (M4x40)
16 Truss tapping screw (M4x10) 10
17 Plain washer (W4) 20

Appx IN-9
2. Assembling the Additional Stand for LCD
(1) Put on the brackets.

Appx IN-10
3. Installing the Optional Items for the Stand Wagon
3.1 Installing the Guide Bracket for Long Cassette

(2) Mount the guide brackets for long cassette.

#1 Put on the packings.
#2 Reinstall the screws.

Appx IN-11
4. Installing the Optional Items for the Additional Stand for LCD 4.2 Installing the Base
REFERENCE
4.1 Mounting the Arm The base can be placed either on the right or the left at symmetrical positions.
u INSTRUCTION u (1) Attach the coupling bracket on the base.

Be sure to fix the additional stand for LCD when the arm is mounted.
{IN:Appendix 3-7._Securing the Additional Stand for LCD}
(1) Mount the arm.

#1 Temporarily tighten the screws.
#2 Mount the arm.
#3 Tighten the screws.
#4 Put on the bracket.
(2) Mount the base on the additional stand for LCD temporarily.

Appx IN-12
4.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack and the Rack for Long Cassette  Mounting the Rack for Long Cassette
(1) Mount the cassette rack (for use of a long cassette) on the additional stand for
REFERENCE LCD.
The cassette rack and the rack for long cassette can be placed either on the right or the left
at symmetrical positions.
 Mounting the Cassette Rack

(1) Mount the cassette rack on the additional stand for LCD.
(2) Apply the seals to the screw holes.
(2) Apply the seals to the screw holes.

Appx IN-13
5. Applying the Seal
(1) Apply the seals to the screw holes on the additional stand for LCD.
REFERENCE
The number of seals to be applied depends on whether an optional part has been
mounted.

Appx IN-14
6. Fixing the Machine (3) Reinstall the bottom cover.
u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u Leave the right-hand side cover and left-hand side cover removed.
Be sure to fix the machine to the stand wagon. Otherwise, the machine might topple.
(4) Fix the machine to the stand wagon.
(4)
(2) Attach the attachment parts to the bottom cover. Q3x20 (x4)
REFERENCE
The attachment parts for the left-hand side and the right-hand side are the same.

#2 Attach the spacers.
#3 Attach the attachment parts.
#4 Tighten the screw.
PRIT07A4003.ai
(5) Reinstall the cover.

{MC:3.1_Cover}

Appx IN-15
7. Securing the Additional Stand for LCD 7.1 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD to the Floor (Anchor Nut)
(1) Place the additional stand for LCD on the anchoring position, and embed the
u NOTE u anchor nuts.
Be sure to fix the additional stand for LCD to the floor or the wall to secure the machine.
{IN:Appendix 5._Embedding the Anchor Nut}
The following three manners are available to fix the additional stand for LCD. Depending <Reference value>
on the conditions on the installation site, follow the reference procedures below to fix the
additional stand for LCD to the floor or to the wall, before securing the machine.
 When fixing the additional stand for LCD to the floor

{IN:Appendix 3-7.1_Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD to the Floor (Anchor Nut)}
 When fixing the additional stand for LCD to the wall

{IN:Appendix 3-7.2_Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Screw)}
{IN:Appendix 3-7.3_Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Wall-Retaining
Fitting (Long Type))}
 Reference information
Refer to the following for the conditions of the floor/wall and how to fix when the additional
stand for LCD is to be fixed to the floor/wall.
{IN:Appendix 4._Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing (2) Secure the additional stand for LCD.
Modes}

Appx IN-16
7.2 Fixing the Additional Stand for LCD on the Wall (Screw) (2) Fix the additional stand for LCD to the wall.
(1) Place the additional stand for LCD on the anchoring position, and mark the u INSTRUCTION u
positions for the screws. Use retaining screws suitable for the material of the wall.
If the wall is made of steel or light-gauge steel, use the cross recessed pan head
tapping screw, and use the flat washer-faced pan-head screw (course thread) for the
wooden wall.
Refer to the following for details.
{IN:Appendix 4._Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing
Modes}
<Reference value>

Appx IN-17
7.3 Fixing the Additional stand for LCD on the Wall (2) Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall.
(Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type)) u INSTRUCTION u
Use retaining screws suitable for the material of the wall.
(1) Assemble the wall-retaining fitting.
REFERENCE tapping screw, and use the flat washer-faced pan-head screw (course thread) for the
The weight of the assembled wall-retaining fitting is approx. 2.1 kg. wooden wall.
Modes}
<Reference value>

Appx IN-18
(3) Mount the additional stand for LCD to the wall-retaining fitting (long type).

Appx IN-19
8. Securing the Stand Wagon (2) Adjust the adjustable feet so that a clearance of A in the figure is 5 mm.
CAUTION
Wheels on the stand wagon are for maintenance, not for transportation.
Stand wagon must be fixed to the floor, on the wall, or to the already-fixed additional
stand for LCD.
8.1 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Floor

(1) Embed the anchor nuts in accordance with the brackets for fixing to the floor.
{IN:Appendix 5._Embedding the Anchor Nut}
<Reference value> (3) Retain the bracket (for fixing to the floor) while pushing it against the machine.
(4) Move the stand wagon to the position to be fixed.

(5) Fix the stand wagon.
(5)
Button bolt
Spring washer (SW8)
Plain washer (W8)
PRIT07A40005.ai

Appx IN-20
8.2 Fixing the Stand Wagon on the Wall (2) Place the stand wagon to the position to be fixed, and mark the positions for the
screws.
(1) Put on the brackets for fixing on the wall.
<Reference value>

Appx IN-21
(3) Fix the stand wagon on the wall.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use retaining screws suitable for the material of the wall.
tapping screw, and use the flat washer-faced pan-head screw (course thread) for the
wooden wall.
Modes}

Appx IN-22
8.3 Fixing the Stand Wagon to the Additional Stand for LCD (2) Put on the brackets.
(1) Move the stand wagon into the additional stand for LCD. u NOTE u
When the base (optional item for the additional stand for LCD) is to be used, fasten it
CAUTION together with the brackets.
When you bring the stand wagon into the additional stand for LCD or pull out the
stand wagon from the additional stand for LCD, exercise care not to have your fingers REFERENCE
pinched at the gap between the stand wagon and the additional stand for LCD. Since the distance between the legs of the additional stand for LCD is a little wider than
the width of the stand wagon, temporarily tighten the screws to fasten the brackets on
both sides before securely tightening them.

Appx IN-23
Appendix 4. Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes

u INSTRUCTION u
Do not impact the additional stand for LCD while reading the image. Otherwise, image abnormality might result.
The floor/wall conditions and the fixing method in respective fixing modes are as follows:
Floor/wall conditions Fixing method
 When the additional stand for LCD is to be fixed to the - Concrete floor - Strike an anchor at four positions, and secure the additional stand
floor - Compression strength of 245 kgf/cm2 or higher is assumed. for LCD with the bolts.
 When the additional stand for LCD is to be directly fixed
to the wall
In the case of a wall made of steel or lightweight steel - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of lightweight steel partition - Secure the additional stand for LCD with four or more cross
aggregate - A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is assumed. recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40).
In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - Secure the additional stand for LCD with four or more flat washer-
- A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of 8.8%/ pine tree faced pan-head screws (course thread, 4.8x45).
with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a water content of 9.0% is assumed. - It is assumed that the additional stand for LCD is fixed to the pillar
in a screwing depth of 27 mm or more.
 When the additional stand for LCD is fixed to the wall by
a wall-retaining fitting (long type) (*1)
In the case of a wall made of steel or lightweight steel - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of lightweight steel partition - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with four or
aggregate - A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is assumed. more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40).
- Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the additional stand for
LCD with four truss tapping screws (4x40).
In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - Secure the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with four or
- A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of 8.8%/ pine tree more flat washer-faced pan-head screw (course thread, 4.8x45).
with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a water content of 9.0% is assumed. - It is assumed that the additional stand for LCD is fixed to the pillar
in a screwing depth of 27 mm or more.
- Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the additional stand for
LCD with four or more truss tapping screws (4x40).
(*1) If a part of the wall where the additional stand for LCD is to be fixed is wider than the additional stand for LCD, the additional stand for LCD is fixed to the wall via an optional wall-retaining fitting (long type).
Whether the additional stand for LCD is directly fixed to the wall or fixed via the wall-retaining fitting (long type) should be decided depending on the following values as reference.

Appx IN-24
Appendix 5. Embedding the Anchor Nut

(1) Mark the position where the anchor nut is to be embedded.
(2) Strike a center punch at the center of the marked position.
(3) Drill a hole, and embed the anchor nut.
CAUTION
When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles.
REFERENCE
Drill prepared holes with a drill bit having a diameter of 5 to 6 mm in order to prevent the
resulting anchor holes from being decentered.

Appx IN-25
Appendix 6. Vehicle Mounting Procedures 2. When Moving the Vehicle
This section describes procedure to mount CR-IR 392 on a vehicle. Turn OFF the main power of the equipment and load the dummy cassette.
For usage of the dummy cassette, see “Vehicle Mounting Operation Manual” enclosed to the
dummy cassette.
For vehicle mounting, the following options are required:
Available item Abbreviated product name Remarks

- Dedicated to PRIMA Tm
Dummy cassette IR DUMMY CASSETTE FOR M MBL E - Enclosed to the Operation
Manual
Anti-Drop Retainer kit IR 392 TABLE FIX KIT = #(E) For retaining the machine
u NOTE u
CAUTION
- When loading the dummy cassette, be sure to turn OFF the main power of the equipment.
- Operating and non-operation climate conditions of the equipment mounted on a - When loading the dummy cassette, be careful not to pinch your hand between the cassette
vehicle are the same range as the one described in the product specification. set base and dummy cassette.
- During the usage of equipment, the power of the equipment might be forcibly turned
OFF if the internal temperature goes up. Therefore, be careful not to block the vent
hole on the side cover.
- If the dummy cassette for PRIMA T is used to PRIMA Tm, the machine might get 3. When Using the Equipment
damaged. Be sure to use the dummy cassette for PRIMA Tm.
Remove the dummy cassette, and turn ON the equipment.
1. Installing the Equipment u NOTE u

- When turning ON the equipment, be sure to remove the dummy cassette.
- When using the equipment, it is recommended to stop the engine of the vehicle. Otherwise,
Mount the equipment on a rack using the anti-drop retainer kit.
unusual nonuniformity may occur in read images.
{IN:Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Drop Retainer}
CAUTION
Secure the rack to mount the equipment firmly to the vehicle.
u NOTE u
The rack to mount the equipment must meet the following specifications:
- The rack should have a load capacity more than 150kgf, and is stable and not shaky.
- Tabletop size: bigger than W560 x D540 x H15 (mm) (W22.0 x D21.3 x H0.6 (inch)).

Appx IN-26
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN-27
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN-28
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Performance Check (PC)

PC-1
CR-IR 392 Performance Check List 3. Installing RU Software

- RU IP address:  Default (172.16.1.10)  Modify (__________)
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of CR-IR 392 installation - FTP server IP address:  Default (172.16.1.20)  Modify (__________)
to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based on the - Identification code of the machine (RU):
instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace the
- Software version:
installation steps set forth in the CR-IR 392 Service Manual but is to be followed concurrently.
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking the - Backup of set file (machine-specific data)  OK  NG
system connection and output image quality (section 4 or later), and then pass the equipment
over to the customer. 4. Image/Conveyance Checks
Installation Information - X-ray exposure information with a dose of ST IP  OK  NG
X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kVp Tube current: mA
Serial Number: Software Ver.: Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber:
Site Name: Installed by: Bulb No.:
Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No 
Site Number: Signature:
IP size: × IP barcode No.:
Room Name: Installation Date/Servicing Date: S value:
- Image/Conveyance Checks  OK  NG
Checklist
- Image format check: white blank portion, ____ mm max. (specified value: 4 mm max.)
 OK  NG
1. Preparation for Installation
{IN:3._Preparation for Installation} - X-ray exposure information with a dose of HR IP  OK  NG
- Checking the Items Supplied  OK  NG Check the following when the HR IP is to be used.
 Machine main body X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kVp Tube current: mA
 Accessories Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber:
 Options Bulb No.:
Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No 
- IP type checks  VI IP size: × IP barcode No.:
S value:
2. Connecting the Cables - Image/Conveyance Checks  OK  NG
{IN:5._Connecting the Cables} - Image format check: white blank portion, ____ mm max. (specified value: 4 mm max.)
- Supply voltage/machine power supply short-circuit check  OK  NG  OK  NG
Power supply voltage: V (specified value: 100 VAC ± 10%)
Continuity check between E and E:  OK  NG (specified value: with continuity) 5. Summary test  OK  NG
Resistance value measured between L and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω) Includes checks for normal bootup and termination.
Resistance value measured between N and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω)
Resistance value measured between L and N: Ω (specified value: 100 KΩ –) 6. Output films or image data are stored as records for performance check
 OK  NG
020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual PC-1

PC-2
7. Test equipment used for the check
Test equipment: Model: S/N:

PC-3
BLANK PAGE

Prima TM SM Ir-392 01e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prima TM SM Ir-392 01e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prima TM SM Ir-392 01e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual

Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation

Search the error code. Installation Specifications

Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints

Sensitivity/Shading Correction Install/version update software and applications.

CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

Features of the Client PC Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD-ROM

Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL

Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the

FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2014 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

1. Handling of this Manual 1.2 Precautions for Handling of this Manual

1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.1

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.2

1. Safety Precautions............................................ Safety-1 3. Protective Housings against

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.3

1. Specifications of the Machine.............................Spec-1

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.4

Machine Description (MD)

1. Machine Overview...................................................MD-1 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations.................MD-13

5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components and

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.6

1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1

2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7

4. Abnormal Images.................................................. MT-45

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.7

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit.......MC-1 4.6 CPU Board.............................................................................. MC-16

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.9

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.10

Maintenance Utility (MU)

1. RU PC-TOOL............................................................MU-1 2. Client PC................................................................MU-25

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.12

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.13

Service Parts List (SP)

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.14

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. How to Use 7. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-13

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.15

12. Reinstalling the Covers and

13. Securing the Machine...........................................PM-20

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.16

1. Specifications of the Machine..................................IN-1 8. Installing the RU PC-TOOL.....................................IN-16

5. Connecting the Cables...........................................IN-12 15. Cleaning the Console/RU.......................................IN-32

7. Installing the Console.............................................IN-15

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.17

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.18

Performance Check (PC)

CR-IR 392 Performance Check List............................. PC-1

020-234-01E CR-IR 392 Service Manual 0.19